683278

Canon VB-M741LE Handleiding

7
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/287
Pagina verder
The Operation Guide should be read before using the network camera.
ENGLISH
Network Camera
Operation Guide
/
/
/
/
2
Thank you for purchasing a Canon Network Camera (hereafter referred to as the camera)*.
This “Operation Guide” explains the camera settings and operations. Read this guide carefully before using the camera to
ensure correct use. Also, be sure to read the files in the LICENSE folder on the Setup CD-ROM.
* The cameras described in this manual may include models not be sold in your country and region.
For the latest information on this product (firmware and included software, user manuals, operating environment, etc.),
please refer to the Canon Web Site.
Precautions for Use (Disclaimer)
Disclaimer
To the full extent permitted by laws and regulations, neither Canon Inc. nor any of its subsidiaries or affiliates shall be
responsible for any financial losses that may be incurred as a result of the loss of recorded information or images,
regardless of the internal or external cause of the loss.
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY ACCOMPANYING THE CAMERA AND WITHOUT
DETRACTING FROM ANY RIGHTS A CONSUMER MAY BE ENTITLED TO, AND TO THE FULL EXTENT PERMITTED
BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS: (1) NEITHER CANON INC. NOR ANY OF ITS SUBSIDIARIES OR AFFILIATES MAKE
ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THE MATERIAL IN THIS MANUAL OR
WITH REGARD TO THE USE OF THE CAMERA INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, OR NON-
INFRINGEMENT AND (2) NEITHER CANON INC. NOR ANY OF ITS SUBSIDIARIES OR AFFILIATES SHALL BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE RESULTING FROM
THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL OR THE CAMERA.
Network Security
The user is responsible for the network security of this product and its use.
Take appropriate network security measures to avoid security breaches. To the full extent permitted by laws and
regulations, neither Canon Inc. nor any of its subsidiaries or affiliates shall be liable for any losses, direct, incidental
or consequential damages, or liabilities that may be incurred as a result of network security incidents such as
unauthorized accesses.
<Network Security Recommendations>
• Change the password of the camera periodically.
• Change the HTTP or HTTPS port number of the camera.
• Limit access to the camera by network devices.
Privacy and Publicity Rights Regarding the Use of Video/Audio
When using the camera (for video or audio), it is the full responsibility of the user to protect privacy and avoid any
violation of publicity rights. For example, obtaining consent to install the camera in advance if specific buildings or
rooms are to be monitored. Canon shall have no liability whatsoever in this regard.
Legal Notice
In some cases, camera monitoring may be prohibited by law or regulation, the details of which differ by country.
Before using the camera, check the laws or regulations of the country or region where the camera is used.
Introduction
3
Copyright
Videos, images or sounds recorded with your camera may not be utilized or published without consent of copyright
holders, if any, except in such a way as permitted for personal use under the relevant copyright law.
Use of Included RM-Lite Software
Flaws or other problems with RM-Lite may result in recording failure or destruction or loss of recorded data. Canon
shall have no liability whatsoever for any loss or damages incurred by the user as a result of such problems.
Product Parts Life
Movable parts of this product (e.g., pan/tilt mechanism) as well as its electronic components may require
replacement at an earlier period, according to where the product is installed, and how it is used.
Please refer to Canon’s web site, for a reference as to the lifespan of the parts, in relation to how the product is used.
License Agreement for Included Software
For information on the License Agreement for Included Software, refer to the following files in the BundledSoftware folder in
the Included Setup CD-ROM LICENSE folder.
This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant
video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or
(2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or
implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Trademarks
• Canon and the Canon logo are registered trademarks of Canon Inc.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, Windows Server, Windows Media and ActiveX are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• Windows is legally recognized as the Microsoft Windows Operating System.
• This product comes with exFAT, a licensed file system technology from Microsoft.
• QuickTime is a trademark of Apple Inc.
• SD, SDHC and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
• All other company or product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.
Open Source Software
The product (camera and included RM-Lite) contains Open Source Software modules. For details, please refer to
“ThirdPartySoftware-E.pdf” (Third-Party Software License) in the Open-SourceSoftware folder in the LICENSE folder on the
Setup CD-ROM. Each module’s license conditions are also available in the same folder.
Software under GPL and LGPL
If you would like to obtain the source code under GPL/LGPL, please contact us at nvsossg@canon.co.jp and provide the
following information in English or Japanese:
1. Product name and firmware version.
Software Type File Name
Camera Management Tool
VBTools-E.txt
Camera Angle Setting Tool
(Used by VB-M641VE, VB-M640VE, VB-M641V, VB-M640V, VB-M741LE, VB-M740E)
Network Video Recording Software RM-Lite RM-Lite-E.txt
4
2. Name of the software module or modules you would like to obtain.
You can obtain the source code for a least three years from the day you purchased this product. Please note we may bill
you for any costs we incur in providing you the source code.
Security Export Control
This product is subject to security export control. Therefore, to export or carry it overseas may require an authorization by
governmental agencies.
5
Types of User Manuals
The following describes the different camera user manuals.
Notes
1. Any unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
2. The contents of this guide are subject to change without any prior notice.
3. This document has been prepared with the utmost attention to accuracy. If you have any comments, however,
please contact a Canon sales representative.
4. Canon shall assume no liability for any outcome of using this product, notwithstanding items 2 and 3 above.
How to Use This Operation Guide
The assumed reading format of this operation guide is on a computer screen.
Software Screenshots
The software screenshots samples shown in this guide are for illustration only. The screenshots may differ from the
actual screens displayed.
Most screenshots used with the explanations are from a Windows 8.1 computer connected to a VB-R11 network
camera.
The video size set selected for explanations is [1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 / 320 x 180]. If using a different video size set,
substitute those sizes.
User Manuals
Included User Manuals
Installation Guide
This describes precautions and procedures for installing the camera. Sections you should reference in this guide will be
marked “Installation Guide” along with the name of the reference items.
Guides Included on the Setup CD-ROM
Operation Guide (This Guide)
This document explains the initial camera settings, Viewer operations, Admin Tools settings, troubleshooting and other
operations.
Appendix – Specifications
This lists the camera specifications.
Camera Management Tool User Manual
This explains details on using the Camera Management Tool.
Network Video Recording Software RM Series Administrator Manual
This explains details on using the RM-Lite video recording software (P. 22).
6
Symbols Indicating Camera Models
Symbols Indicating Camera Models
Explanations that differ depending on the camera model are indicated by the camera name and the following
symbols.
Symbols Indicating Safety Precautions
This section explains the symbols used in this guide. The following symbols used in this guide indicate information for
safe use of the product, as well as important and supplemental information the user should know. Be sure to read and
understand this information when using the product.
Symbol Camera Model
VB-R11VE, VB-R11
VB-R10VE
VB-M641VE, VB-M641V
VB-M640VE, VB-M640V
VB-M741LE
VB-M740E
R11
R10
M641
M640
M741
M740
Symbol Meaning
Warning
Failure to follow the instructions indicated by this symbol may result in death or serious
injury. Be sure to follow these warnings to ensure safety.
Caution
Failure to follow the instructions indicated by this symbol may result in injury. Be sure to
follow these precautions to ensure safety.
Caution
Failure to follow the instructions indicated by this symbol may result in property damage.
Be sure to follow these precautions.
Important
Cautions and restrictions during operation. Make sure to read these carefully.
Note
Supplementary descriptions and reference information.
7
This section explains precautions that must be followed when using the camera.
If they are not followed, injury, death and/or property damage may occur. Read the following information carefully and be
sure to follow the precautions.
Important Warnings
Safety Precautions
Warning
To reduce a risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this product to rain or moisture.
(VB-R11, VB-M641V, VB-M640V)
Caution
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The AC adapter (sold separately) can be connected to the camera from a standard AC power outlet.
Please refer to the user manual to make sure that the camera is compatible with the adapter.
• The socket-outlet should be installed near the equipment and should be easily accessible.
• Unplug the equipment from the wall outlet before cleaning or maintaining.
FDA regulation
This Network Camera has not been evaluated by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for use as a medical
device. When incorporated into a system with medical applications, FDA regulations may apply. Therefore, please
consult your legal advisor to determine whether FDA regulations apply.
FCC REGULATIONS
Network Camera, Model Name: VB-R11VE/VB-R10VE/VB-M641VE/VB-M640VE/VB-M741LE/VB-M740E
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the user manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such
changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
European Union regulatory notices:
Network Camera, Model Name: VB-R11VE/VB-R10VE/VB-M641VE/VB-M640VE/VB-M741LE/VB-M740E
Warning
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the
user may be required to take adequate measures.
8
Precautions
Camera Precautions
FCC NOTICE
Network Camera, Model Name: VB-R11/VB-M641V/VB-M640V
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such
changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A., Inc.
One Canon Park, Melville, New York 11747, U.S.A.
Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)
Warning
If you notice abnormal conditions, such as smoke, unusual sounds, heat or strange odors, immediately stop using
the camera and contact your nearest dealer.
Fire or electric shock may result from continued use.
The following may result in fire or electric shock.
• If thunder starts, stop installation or inspection etc. and do not touch the camera or continue connecting the cable.
• Do not disassemble or modify the camera.
• Spray the camera with water, or otherwise make it wet (VB-R11/VB-M641V/VB-M640V).
• Please do not insert objects like water or metal objects within the camera housing.
• Do not use flammable sprays near the camera.
• Do not leave LAN cables, external power supplies or AC adapter (sold separately) power connectors connected
when the camera is not in use for long periods.
• Do not damage the connecting cable.
This camera should not be used with medical devices or other life-support systems.
Depending on the computer and network environment, high-precision video transmission cannot be guaranteed due
to video lag or loss.
Canon will assume no liability for any accident or damage resulting from use of the camera under the conditions
above.
9
Camera Angle Setting Tool Precautions
Precautions for Built-In Camera Functions and Included Software
Maintenance Precautions
Clean the Camera
Turn off the power before cleaning the camera.
Clean the Exterior
1 Dampen a soft cloth with water or diluted neutral detergent and gently wipe away any grime.
2 Wipe with a dry cloth.
Caution
Avoid looking directly at the infrared illumination at close distance for long periods of time.
Intense infrared illumination can cause eye damage.
Caution
The following may result in camera malfunction.
• Do not capture the sun, halogen lamps, and other very bright light sources or subjects.
• Do not expose the camera to strong impact or vibration.
• Do not forcibly turn the rotating parts of the camera by hand.
M741
R11 R10
M641 M640
M641
M640
M741
M740
Caution
The Camera Angle Setting Tool is for use when installing the camera. Do not use on a daily basis.
Frequent use may result in camera malfunction.
Caution
Do not use the following built-in camera functions or included software in situations requiring high reliability:
– Intelligent Function
– Image Stabilization Function
– Network Video Recording Software RM-Lite
These do not guarantee high-precision capture and cannot support applications beyond their intended range of use.
Canon will assume no liability for any accident or damage resulting from the use of these functions or software.
Warning
Do not use flammable solvents such as alcohol, paint thinner or benzine when cleaning the camera.
Use of these may result in fire or electric shock.
Caution
Periodically inspect the parts and screws for rust and loosening.
For inspections, please contact the dealer where you purchased the product.
Failure to follow these precautions could result in injuries and equipment damage due to falling items.
10
Clean the Lens
Use a commercial lens cleaner to remove grime on the lens surface.
• Scratches on the lens surface may result in poor video capture.
• Auto focus functionality may be degraded if the lens surface is dusty or dirty.
Camera Disposal
Dispose of the camera in accordance with local laws and regulations.
Important
Grime on the front cover and dome cover, may result in focusing problems, and or reduction of image quality. It is recommended
that the cover be cleaned on a regular basis.
11
Table of Contents
Introduction...................................................................................................................... 2
Precautions for Use (Disclaimer) ............................................................................................ 2
License Agreement for Included Software ............................................................................. 3
Trademarks ............................................................................................................................. 3
Open Source Software............................................................................................................3
Security Export Control ........................................................................................................... 4
User Manuals................................................................................................................... 5
Types of User Manuals ...........................................................................................................5
How to Use This Operation Guide .......................................................................................... 5
Symbols Indicating Camera Models....................................................................................... 6
Safety Precautions........................................................................................................... 7
Precautions ............................................................................................................................. 8
Clean the Camera ................................................................................................................... 9
Camera Disposal .................................................................................................................. 10
Chapter 1 Before Use
Network Camera Capabilities........................................................................................ 20
Camera Software ........................................................................................................... 21
Software Included on the Camera ........................................................................................ 21
Software Included on the Setup CD-ROM ............................................................................ 21
Additional Software/Licenses (Sold Separately)................................................................... 23
Operating Environment.................................................................................................. 24
Camera Angle Setting Tool, Admin Viewer/VB Viewer, Admin Tools ................................... 24
Steps for Setting Up Camera......................................................................................... 25
Step 1 Pre-Installation Preparations...................................................................................... 25
Step 2 Check Camera Connection ....................................................................................... 25
Step 3 Install the Camera...................................................................................................... 25
Step 4 Set the Camera Angle .............................................................................................. 25
Step 5 Adjust Advanced Settings According to Use............................................................ 26
Step 6 Use the Viewers......................................................................................................... 26
Step 7 Use Admin Tools ....................................................................................................... 26
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 26
Chapter 2 Camera Setup
Install Software .............................................................................................................. 28
Necessary Software..............................................................................................................28
Software Installation.............................................................................................................. 28
Check/Make Security Settings....................................................................................... 31
Check Firewall Settings.........................................................................................................31
Register the Camera IP Address as a Trusted Site .............................................................. 32
Settings When Using Windows Server.................................................................................. 33
Making Initial Camera Settings...................................................................................... 36
Launch the Camera Management Tool ................................................................................ 36
Searching for Cameras and Setting up Networks ................................................................ 36
12
Set the Password, Date and Time, Camera Name and Video.............................................. 38
Registering Camera’s IP Address to Trusted Sites............................................................... 40
Access the Top Page of the Camera to Check Video................................................... 41
Access the Top Page from Camera Management Tool........................................................ 41
Top Page............................................................................................................................... 41
Checking Camera Video....................................................................................................... 43
Chapter 3 Camera Angle Setting Tool
Launch the Camera Angle Setting Tool and Connect to a Camera .............................. 46
Launch the Camera Angle Setting Tool ................................................................................ 46
Connect to the Camera......................................................................................................... 46
Disconnect from the Camera and Close the Software.......................................................... 49
Camera Angle Setting Tool Screen ............................................................................... 51
Set the Camera Angle ................................................................................................... 53
Set the Camera Angle and Zoom ......................................................................................... 53
Set the Focus and Exposure Compensation ........................................................................ 54
Use a Camera Specification File ................................................................................... 56
Create a Camera Specification File ...................................................................................... 56
Chapter 4 Setting Page
How to Use The Setting Page........................................................................................ 60
Access the Setting Page....................................................................................................... 60
Common Setting Page Operations ....................................................................................... 61
About Each Setting Page...................................................................................................... 62
Configure Network Settings
[Basic Settings] > [Network] .................................................................................... 64
LAN ....................................................................................................................................... 64
IPv4 ....................................................................................................................................... 64
IPv6 ....................................................................................................................................... 65
DNS....................................................................................................................................... 66
mDNS.................................................................................................................................... 67
Set the Administrator Password
[Basic Settings] > [Password] ................................................................................. 68
Administrator Password........................................................................................................ 68
Set the Date/Time
[Basic Settings] > [Date and Time].......................................................................... 69
Current Date and Time.......................................................................................................... 69
Setting................................................................................................................................... 69
Set Video Size and Quality
[Basic Settings] > [Video Settings] .......................................................................... 72
All Videos .............................................................................................................................. 72
JPEG ..................................................................................................................................... 72
H.264(1) ................................................................................................................................ 73
H.264(2) ................................................................................................................................ 74
Set General Camera Controls
[Camera] > [Camera Settings]................................................................................. 75
Camera Name....................................................................................................................... 75
13
Camera Control..................................................................................................................... 75
Day/Night (When Auto Is Set) ............................................................................................... 77
Installation Conditions........................................................................................................... 77
Camera Position Control ....................................................................................................... 78
External Input Device 1, 2 .................................................................................................. 78
External Output Device 1, 2 ............................................................................................... 78
Set Initial Video Settings
[Camera] > [Initial Setting]....................................................................................... 79
Initial Setting.......................................................................................................................... 79
Reduce Data Size by Lowering Video Quality in Specific Areas
[Video and Audio] > [ADSR].................................................................................... 82
Specified Area ...................................................................................................................... 82
ADSR..................................................................................................................................... 84
Display Date, Time and Text on the Viewer
[Video and Audio] > [On-screen display]................................................................ 85
On-Screen Display................................................................................................................ 85
Set Audio Input/Output
[Video and Audio] > [Audio Settings] ...................................................................... 87
General Sound ...................................................................................................................... 87
Sound Clip Upload1to 3........................................................................................................ 88
HTTP, SNMP and FTP Server Settings
[Server] > [Server Settings] ..................................................................................... 89
HTTP Server.......................................................................................................................... 89
SNMP Server......................................................................................................................... 89
FTP Server............................................................................................................................. 90
WS-Security........................................................................................................................... 90
Video Transmission Settings
[Server] > [Video Server] ......................................................................................... 91
Audio Transmission/Reception Settings
[Server] > [Audio Server] ......................................................................................... 92
RTP Settings
[Server] > [RTP Server]............................................................................................ 93
RTP Server ............................................................................................................................ 93
Audio Multicast ................................................................................................................... 93
RTP Streaming 1 to 5 ............................................................................................................94
HTTP and FTP Upload Settings
[Video Record] > [Upload] ...................................................................................... 96
Video Record Setting............................................................................................................96
General Upload..................................................................................................................... 96
HTTP Upload......................................................................................................................... 97
FTP Upload ........................................................................................................................... 99
Settings for Recording Video to a Memory Card
[Video Record] > [Memory Card] .......................................................................... 101
Video Record Setting.......................................................................................................... 101
Memory Card Operations ................................................................................................... 101
Memory Card Information ................................................................................................... 101
14
Set E-mail Notification
[Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] ................................................................... 102
E-mail Notification ............................................................................................................... 102
External Device Input Triggered Operation Settings
[Event] > [External Device] ................................................................................... 104
External Device Output 1, 2................................................................................................ 104
External Device Input.......................................................................................................... 104
External Device Input 1, 2................................................................................................... 105
Abnormal Audio Input Triggered Operation Settings
[Event] > [Audio Detection] ................................................................................... 107
Volume Detection................................................................................................................107
Scream Detection ............................................................................................................... 108
Timer Triggered Operation Settings
[Event] > [Timer] .................................................................................................... 110
Timer 1 to 4 ......................................................................................................................... 110
Execute Presets When Switching Day/Night Mode
[Event] > [Switch Day/Night].................................................................................. 112
Use Event Combinations
[Event] > [Linked Event] ........................................................................................ 113
Linked Event 1 to 4 .............................................................................................................113
Linked Event Operation Examples...................................................................................... 115
Set Users Who Connect to the Camera
[Security] > [User Restrictions].............................................................................. 118
Authorized User Account.................................................................................................... 118
User Authority ..................................................................................................................... 118
Set Access Restrictions
[Security] > [Host Access Restrictions] ................................................................. 119
IPv4 Host Access Restrictions ............................................................................................ 119
IPv6 Host Access Restrictions ............................................................................................ 120
Set HTTP Communication Encryption
[Security] > [SSL/TLS]............................................................................................ 121
Certificates.......................................................................................................................... 121
Certificate Management...................................................................................................... 122
Encrypted Communications................................................................................................ 123
Network Port Authentication Settings
[Security] > [802.1X] .............................................................................................. 124
802.1X Authentication......................................................................................................... 124
Authentication Method........................................................................................................ 124
Set IPsec
[Security] > [IPsec] ................................................................................................ 126
IPsec ................................................................................................................................... 126
Auto Key Exchange Settings .............................................................................................. 126
IPsec Set 1 to 5 ................................................................................................................... 127
Memory Card Operations and Information Display
[Memory Card]....................................................................................................... 130
Video Record Setting.......................................................................................................... 130
15
Memory Card Operations ................................................................................................... 130
Memory Card Information ................................................................................................... 132
Display Camera Device Information and Perform Maintenance [Maintenance] ......... 134
Device Information..............................................................................................................134
Tool ..................................................................................................................................... 134
Chapter 5 Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
Admin Viewer and VB Viewer ...................................................................................... 138
Major Differences Between the Admin Viewer and the VB Viewer ..................................... 138
Viewer Access Restrictions................................................................................................. 138
View Video With Admin Viewer.................................................................................... 140
Launch the Admin Viewer ................................................................................................... 140
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer Screen ........................................................................................ 141
Check Information...............................................................................................................143
Change the Video Size and Display Screen Size ............................................................... 143
Operate the Camera With Admin Viewer..................................................................... 147
Obtain Camera Control Privileges ...................................................................................... 147
Use Pan/Tilt/Zoom...............................................................................................................147
Magnify and Display Part of Video (Viewer PTZ) ................................................................ 151
Cropping and Displaying Part of an Image (Digital PTZ) ................................................... 153
Using Presets or the Home Position ................................................................................... 154
Use Backlight Compensation ............................................................................................. 155
Receive/Transmit Audio .................................................................................................... 155
Use Control for Admin ................................................................................................. 158
Control for Admin Panel...................................................................................................... 158
Pan / Tilt / Zoom ................................................................................................................. 159
Preset / Initial Setting Registration ...................................................................................... 159
Smart Shade Control........................................................................................................... 159
Haze Compensation ........................................................................................................... 160
Focus .................................................................................................................................. 161
Exposure ............................................................................................................................. 162
White Balance..................................................................................................................... 164
Day/Night ............................................................................................................................ 165
Infrared .............................................................................................................................. 167
External Device Output ..................................................................................................... 167
Image Quality Adjustment................................................................................................... 168
Video Reception.................................................................................................................. 168
About Presets .............................................................................................................. 169
Register Presets .......................................................................................................... 170
Display the Preset Setting Panel......................................................................................... 170
Use [Quick Registration]..................................................................................................... 172
Register with [Advanced Preset Settings] Panel ................................................................ 173
Context Menu...................................................................................................................... 175
Change Multiple Presets Simultaneously............................................................................ 176
Automatically Move to a Preset Position at a Specified Time
(Auto Control Settings) ........................................................................................... 177
Configure [Auto Control Settings] ....................................................................................... 177
16
Configure the Preset Tour Route ................................................................................. 179
[Tour Route Settings] Tab................................................................................................... 179
Tour Route Settings.............................................................................................................181
Context Menu...................................................................................................................... 183
Check the Event Detection Status With Admin Viewer................................................ 184
Confirm Status With the Event Display Panel...................................................................... 184
Record Snapshots/Video With Admin Viewer.............................................................. 186
Capture a Snapshot............................................................................................................ 186
Record Video to a Memory Card Manually......................................................................... 186
Use VB Viewer ............................................................................................................. 188
Launch VB Viewer and Differences with Admin Viewer...................................................... 188
Chapter 6 Admin Tools
Admin Tools Overview................................................................................................. 192
Overview of Each Tool in the Admin Tools ......................................................................... 192
Access Admin Tools.................................................................................................... 193
Launch Admin Tools ........................................................................................................... 193
Admin Tools Operations Common to All Tools ................................................................... 194
Privacy Mask Setting Tool ........................................................................................... 196
Register Privacy Masks....................................................................................................... 196
Change/Delete a Privacy Mask........................................................................................... 198
Panorama Creation Tool .............................................................................................. 201
Create a Panorama Image.................................................................................................. 201
Delete a Panorama Image from the Camera ...................................................................... 204
Save/Load Panorama Image File........................................................................................ 204
View Restriction Setting Tool ...................................................................................... 206
Configure View Restrictions ................................................................................................ 206
Intelligent Function Setting Tool Overview .................................................................. 210
Intelligent Function.............................................................................................................. 210
Notes on Intelligent Function Settings and Operations ...................................................... 213
Pre-register Presets ..........................................................................................................214
Select the Intelligent Function Operation Mode ................................................................ 214
Intelligent Function Setting Tool
- Video Detection - ................................................................................................ 216
Steps for Configuring Video Detection ............................................................................... 216
Configure Detection Criteria ([Detection Criteria] Tab) ...................................................... 219
Configure Operations for Triggered Detection ([Event] Tab) ............................................. 227
Reduce Effects of Lighting Change (Detections Settings) ................................................. 228
Context Menu...................................................................................................................... 229
Intelligent Function Setting Tool
- Auto Tracking - .................................................................................................... 230
Set Auto Tracking................................................................................................................ 230
Auto Tracking Termination.................................................................................................. 233
Disable Auto Tracking......................................................................................................... 233
Intelligent Function Setting Tool
Display Options and Shared Operations .............................................................. 234
Display Event Status ........................................................................................................... 234
17
Display Settings for Detection Areas/Detection Lines, Detection Results
(Display Options)............................................................................................................ 234
Restart Intelligent Function ................................................................................................. 235
Log Viewer................................................................................................................... 236
Download Log Files ............................................................................................................ 236
View Logs............................................................................................................................ 237
Recorded Video Utility................................................................................................. 240
Use the Video List............................................................................................................... 240
Download/Delete Video ...................................................................................................... 242
Play Back Video .................................................................................................................. 245
Chapter 7 Appendix
Memory Card Data ...................................................................................................... 250
Saved Data and Data Organization of Memory Card ......................................................... 250
Data Downloaded with Recorded Video Utility................................................................... 250
Modifiers ...................................................................................................................... 252
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 254
List of Log Messages .................................................................................................. 256
Log Messages on the Camera............................................................................................ 256
Error Log ............................................................................................................................. 256
Warning log......................................................................................................................... 261
Notification log .................................................................................................................... 263
List of Viewer Messages.............................................................................................. 269
Messages Displayed in the Information Display................................................................. 269
Restore Default Settings .............................................................................................. 270
Restoring the Initial Setting from the Maintenance Page in the Web Browser ................... 270
Restoring Factory Default Settings with the Reset Switch on the Camera ......................... 270
List of Factory Default Settings.................................................................................... 273
Index............................................................................................................................ 283
18
Chapter
Before Use
This chapter explains camera functions, software and operating environment.
It also describes the flow from preparation and setup through to actual use.
20
This network camera is capable of not just camera operations using the installed software but also recording and uploading
video and monitoring using various intelligent functions.
However, the functions that can be used differ depending on the model. For the difference in functions by model, refer to
the table below.
Table of Function Compatibility by Model
The functions for which availability differs depending on the model are shown below.
* In this guide, “memory card” refers to the memory cards that can be used by the cameras.
Network Camera Capabilities
Uploading
video
Recording to
memory card
Operation and setup by
administrator
[Admin Viewer]
Operation by guest users
[VB Viewer]
Monitoring by
intelligent functions
Inputting/outputting
audio
Using external devices
Pan/Tilt  ----
Digital PTZ - - 
Audio I/O Terminals - - -
External Device Terminals - - -
Infrared Illumination - - - - -
Camera Angle Setting Tool - - 
Audio Detection - - -
Auto Tracking  ----
Event Triggered Preset Movement  ----
Linked Event - - -
Panorama Creation Tool  ----
View Restriction Setting Tool  ----
microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC memory card
support*
-- --
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card support*  --
Max. Number of Registered Presets 257 21
R11
R10
M641
M640 M741
M740
Before Use
1
21
The software needed for camera setup and use is included on the camera and on the setup CD-ROM included with the
camera. The software can also be purchased separately.
Software Included on the Camera
The following software is included on the camera. It is automatically downloaded from the camera when you use it.
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer (P. 137)
These Viewers are used for camera control and for monitoring video and events.
Admin Viewer can only be used by administrators and registered users with camera control permissions, and allows
complete control of the camera.
The VB Viewer allows any user with camera access to use the camera, but the user is restricted to a limited set of
functions.
Admin Tools (P. 191)
This tool is used for making camera settings and for managing cameras.
• Privacy Mask Setting Tool
• Intelligent Function Setting Tool
• Log Viewer
• Recorded Video Utility
• Panorama Creation Tool
• View Restriction Setting Tool
Note
To use Admin Viewer and Admin Tools, .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (when using Internet Explorer 8/9) or .NET Framework 4.5 (when
using Internet Explorer 10/11) is necessary.
If it is not installed on the computer, it will be automatically installed when using the installer (P. 28).
Software Included on the Setup CD-ROM
The software included on the setup CD-ROM is installed and used on a computer.
Camera Management Tool (P. 36)
This tool is used for batch managing multiple cameras, from making settings to performing maintenance. The
Camera Management Tool can perform the following tasks.
• Set various camera settings.
• Launch software included on the camera, such as Admin Viewer and Admin Tools.
• Update firmware, back up/restore settings, perform memory card and other operations, as well as, camera
maintenance.
This guide explains how to use this tool to make initial settings for cameras (P. 36). For details on other uses and
functions, please refer to the “Camera Management Tool User Manual”.
The Camera Management Tool can be installed by the installer application.
Installer location: Setup CD-ROM > [Applications] folder > VBToolsInstall.exe
Camera Software
R11
R10
22
Camera Angle Setting Tool (P. 45)
This tool allows you to adjust the camera angle during installation by viewing video from the camera on the computer
screen via a network.
Installer location: Setup CD-ROM > [Applications] folder > VBToolsInstall.exe
Admin Tools Certificate
This is a digital certificate for using Admin Viewer and Admin Tools.
Installer location: Setup CD-ROM > [Applications] folder > VBToolsInstall.exe
Admin Viewer/Admin Tools with Proxy Authentication Support
Use these when going through a proxy server with proxy authentication.
Software location: Setup CD-ROM > ProxyAuthSupport folder
RM-Lite
This software displays, records and plays back video from up to four cameras via a network.
Software location: Setup CD-ROM > [Applications] folder > RMLiteInstall.exe
RM-Lite Software
M641
M640
M741
M740
Type Overview License
RM-Lite Storage Server Up to four cameras can be registered to record video (JPEG). 1 license
RM-Lite Viewer
Plays video recorded in the storage server and displays live video
(JPEG/H.264) from the camera.
Up to four cameras can be registered for the viewer.
1 license
RM-Lite Manager Use register cameras and configure recording schedules. 1 license
RM-Lite Viewer RM-Lite Storage Server
Network
Flow of video from the camera
Flow of recorded video
Supported
cameras
VB-R11VE, VB-R11, VB-R10VE, VB-M641VE, VB-M641V, VB-M640VE, VB-M640V, VB-M741LE,
VB-M740E, VB-H43, VB-H630VE, VB-H630D, VB-H730F, VB-M42, VB-M620VE, VB-M620D,
VB-M720F, VB-S30D, VB-S31D, VB-S800D, VB-S900F, VB-S805D, VB-S905F, VB-H41,
VB-H610VE, VB-H610D, VB-H710F, VB-M40, VB-M600VE, VB-M600D, VB-M700F, VB-C60,
VB-C500VD/VB-C500D, VB-C300, VB-C50i/VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi/VB-C50Fi
Important
To add the RM-Lite Viewer or RM-Lite Manager, you must purchase RM-Lite-V (sold separately).
Before Use
1
23
Note
For details on the usage, operating environment, and functions of RM-Lite, please refer to the “System Administrator Manual”.
Additional Software/Licenses (Sold Separately)
You can purchase additional software and licenses as necessary.
Canon H.264 Additional User License AUL-VB
Additional license for viewing H.264 video with multiple computers via Admin Viewer or Recorded Video Utility.
Each camera includes one license. Additional licenses are necessary for multiple computers to view H.264 video
from a single camera.
RM-64/RM-25/RM-9
This software allows network cameras to be used for multipoint surveillance, and for displaying, recording and
playing back videos from the camera.
The number of cameras that can be registered with RM-64/RM-25/RM-9 varies: 64, 25, or 9 cameras respectively can
be registered. By using multiple Storage Servers, you can construct a surveillance system supporting up to 512
cameras.
Note
Licenses for upgrading from RM-9 to RM-25 or RM-64, and from RM-25 to RM-64 are also available.
RM-V
This additional license lets you install the RM-64/RM-25/RM-9 RM Manager and Viewer on multiple computers.
Purchase the license to be able to view video from the camera from multiple locations and for other similar purposes.
RM-Lite-V
This additional license lets you install the RM-Lite Viewer or RM-Lite Manager on multiple computers.
Purchase the license to be able to view video from the camera from multiple locations and for other similar purposes.
24
For the latest information on this product (firmware and included software, user manual, operating environment, etc.),
please refer to the Canon Web Site.
Camera Angle Setting Tool, Admin Viewer/VB Viewer, Admin Tools
*1 Set the Control Panel’s font size (DPI) for Admin Tools and Admin Viewer to 100% or 125%.
*2 The browser must support JavaScript, XAML browser applications, and IFRAME (HTML tag).
The VB Viewer requires Cookies.
*3 Installation is unnecessary if only VB Viewer will be used. .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 and 4.5 are provided on the included
setup CD-ROM, and the appropriate installer is selected automatically depending on the version of Internet Explorer.
*4 The included software or the software installed on the camera cannot be started from the Start screen added to Windows
8 and later.
Note
For details on using Camera Management Tool, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User Manual”.
Operating Environment
CPU Intel Core i7-2600 or higher
OS*
1
Windows Vista Ultimate/Business/Enterprise/Home Premium SP2 32/64-bit
Windows 7 Ultimate/Professional/Enterprise/Home Premium SP1 32/64-bit
Windows 8/Windows 8 Pro/Windows 8 Enterprise 32/64-bit*
4
Windows 8.1/Windows 8.1 Pro/Windows 8.1 Enterprise 32/64-bit*
4
Windows Server 2008 Standard SP2 32/64-bit
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard SP1 64-bit
Windows Server 2012 Standard 64-bit*
4
Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard 64-bit*
4
Web Browser
*2
Internet Explorer 8/9 32-bit
Internet Explorer 10/11
Memory 2 GB or more
Viewer Display 1920 x 1080 or higher
Software*
3
.NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (when using Internet Explorer 8/9)
– Must be installed on Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 systems
.NET Framework 4.5 (when using Internet Explorer 10/11)
– Must be installed on Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 systems
Audio A computer that supports audio is required to use the camera’s audio function.
Before Use
1
25
Step 1 Pre-Installation Preparations
Make preparations to use the camera via a network.
Install necessary software
“Install Software” (P. 28)
Check/configure computer and web browser security settings
“Check/Make Security Settings” (P. 31)
Use Camera Management Tool to configure initial camera settings.
“Making Initial Camera Settings” (P. 36)
Step 2 Check Camera Connection
Access the camera with a computer to ensure preparations have been properly
completed.
Access the camera top page using a web browser
“Access the Top Page from Camera Management Tool” (P. 41)
Launch VB Viewer to check camera video
“Checking Camera Video” (P. 43)
Step 3 Install the Camera
Install the camera to suit the operating environment it will be used in.
“Installation Guide”
Step 4 Set the Camera Angle
Use Camera Angle Setting Tool to set the camera angle while checking video
on the computer screen.
“Camera Angle Setting Tool” (P. 45)
Steps for Setting Up Camera
Camera Management Tool
VB Viewer
M641
M640
M741
M740
Camera Angle Setting Tool
26
Step 5 Adjust Advanced Settings According to Use
Advanced settings can be made in the Setting Menu, such as for
camera control and security, suitable for the intended camera
use.
“Setting Page” (P. 59)
Step 6 Use the Viewers
Use the viewers included on the camera.
The Admin Viewer is intended for administrators, and the VB
Viewer for guest users. Use the VB viewer to check content
distributed to guest users and Admin Viewer to make all settings
and fully check all preparations.
“Admin Viewer/VB Viewer” (P. 137)
Step 7 Use Admin Tools
Admin Tools can be used to set masks to ensure privacy, set view restrictions
and set the Intelligent Function to detect changes in video.
You can also view logs of the camera’s operational status, as well as browsing
and managing video recorded to the camera’s memory card.
“Admin Tools” (P. 191)
Troubleshooting
Please refer to the “Appendix” (P. 249), in case of error messages or problems.
Setting Page
Admin Viewer
Chapter
Camera Setup
To prepare the camera for use, install necessary computer software and make initial settings for web browser
security and the camera.
When initial settings are complete, access the camera and check if video can be viewed.
28
Use the setup CD-ROM included with the camera to install necessary software.
Necessary Software
You will need the following software:
• Camera Management Tool (P. 36)
• Admin Tools Certificate
• .NET Framework 3.5 SP1/.NET Framework 4.5 (unnecessary if already installed on computer)
• Camera Angle Setting Tool
Note
• All computer users will be able to use Admin Viewer and Admin Tools if the Admin Tools Certificate is installed.
• If .NET Framework 3.5 SP1/.NET Framework 4.5 is not installed on the computer, the installer will automatically install the version
appropriate for the version of Internet Explorer used on the computer.
Software Installation
Installation Methods
The software can be installed together using [Easy Installation], or you can select which software to install using
[Custom Installation].
Note
• [Easy Installation] will also install the Camera Angle Setting Tool, which cannot be used by VB-R11VE, VB-R11 and VB-R10VE.
Use [Custom Installation] and exclude the Camera Angle Setting Tool if you do not need to install it.
• If you plan to use Admin Viewer and Admin Tools on a computer that will not be used for the initial camera setup (a computer that
does not have Camera Management Tool installed), you can select [Custom installation] and only install the “Admin Tools
Certificate”.
Install Software
The installation screen appears.
Note
If the [User Account Control] screen appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
Install Software
M641 M640
M741
M740
1
Insert the setup CD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
2
Confirm that all other applications have been closed.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon > [Applications] folder > [VBToolsInstall.exe] in Windows Explorer.
Camera Setup
2
29
If you select [Easy Installation], confirm the software that will be installed and click [Next].
If you select [Custom Installation], select the software to be installed and click [Next].
The User License Agreement screen appears.
4
Select the installation method.
5
Confirm or select the software that will be installed.
30
Installation starts.
The Camera Management Tool icon and Camera Angle Setting Tool icon (if installed) will appear on the desktop.
6
Read through the user license agreement and click [Yes] if you accept it.
7
Click [Exit] or [Reboot].
Camera Setup
2
31
Depending on Windows or Internet Explorer security settings, software or web browsers may be blocked from making
camera settings or using the camera.
Change or check security settings beforehand.
Check Firewall Settings
To use the Camera Management Tool on computers where Windows Firewall is enabled, you may need to register the
Camera Management Tool as an application allowed to communicate via the firewall.
Note
Even if you do not perform the following steps, you can still register the Camera Management Tool with the [Windows Security Alert] dialog
box that appears when you launch the software (P. 36).
Check/Make Security Settings
1
Click [System and Security] > [Windows Firewall] in [Control Panel].
2
Click [Allow an app or feature through Windows Firewall].
32
Register the Camera IP Address as a Trusted Site
In Internet Explorer 9 or later and Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2012, Internet Explorer’s security level for Internet
and intranet sites is set to [High] by default.
As a result, it may be necessary to register the camera’s IP address as a trusted site to access the Admin Viewer/VB Viewer,
Setting Page or Admin Tools.
Note
• Set the camera IP address with the Camera Management Tool (P. 37).
• If you skip registration in this step, you can perform registration later using Camera Management Tool (P. 40).
3
Click [Change settings] > [Allow another app].
4
Select [Camera Management Tool] and click [Add].
1
Click [Tools] menu > [Internet Options] in Internet Explorer.
2
Click the [Security] tab.
Camera Setup
2
33
The [Trusted sites] dialog box appears.
Note
• Clear the [Require server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone] check box if it is selected.
The camera’s IP address will be registered to the [Websites] list.
• You can register IP addresses for multiple cameras by using a wildcard (*) when entering the IP address.
For example, if you enter “192.160.1.*”, all cameras that share the “192.160.1” portion of the address will be registered as trusted
sites.
Settings When Using Windows Server
Register “about:internet” and the Camera Host Name
Admin Viewer and Admin Tools will not launch when IE ESC (Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration) is
enabled in Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2012.
Before using the tools, register “about:internet” and the host name for the connected camera in the Internet Explorer
“local intranet” or “trusted sites” list.
3
Click [Trusted sites] > [Sites].
4
Enter the IP address of the camera under [Add this Web site to the zone], then click [Add].
34
Security Settings When Using an SSL Connection
When an SSL connection to the camera is made from a web browser (Internet Explorer 9/10/11) in Windows Server
2008/Windows Server 2012, the following operations may cause the display of the blocked content dialog box and
prevent further operation.
• The launching of Admin Tools or Admin Viewer
• Audio reception from VB Viewer
This occurs when Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration (IE ESC) is enabled in Internet Explorer 9/10/11.
Use the procedures below to change this setting.
Sound Settings for Using the Audio Functions
In Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2012, the sound function is disabled by default.
To use audio functions with the viewer, follow the steps below to enable the sound function.
Important
When “about:internet” is registered, the security level in Windows 7 is the same as when using Internet Explorer. After using Admin
Viewer/Admin Tools, it is recommended that you remove “about:internet” and the camera name as necessary and restore the
original security level.
1
Click [Tools] menu > [Internet Options] in Internet Explorer 9/10/11.
2
Click the [Advanced] tab.
3
Clear the [Do not save encrypted pages to disk] check box in [Security].
Important
Note that when Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration is turned back on, the [Do not save encrypted pages to disk]
check box also becomes enabled.
1
Open [Control Panel] and click [Hardware].
Camera Setup
2
35
[Audio Service Not Running] dialog box appears.
The [Sound] dialog box appears.
If no audio device is installed, refer to your computer manual.
2
Click [Sound].
3
Click [Yes].
4
Click the [Playback] tab to confirm that an audio device has been installed.
36
To use the camera, you must first set the network settings for the camera and then establish a network connection between
the camera and a computer. Use Camera Management Tool for these settings.
This section will explain, in addition to network settings, how to set the camera name, the date and time and other settings.
It will also explain how to use the Camera Management Tool to make initial camera settings.
Note
• For details on using Camera Management Tool, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User Manual”.
• The settings made here will be reflected in the settings on the Setting Page (P. 59).
Launch the Camera Management Tool
Launch the Camera Management Tool that was installed onto the computer from the setup CD-ROM.
Please refer to “Installation Guide” > “Connecting the Camera”
Camera Management Tool launches and the [Camera Search Settings] dialog box appears.
The Camera Management Tool main screen will appear.
Searching for Cameras and Setting up Networks
This will explain network settings so you can search for network connected cameras and connect to them from a computer.
The examples will be for setting one camera. The Camera Management Tool, however, can set multiple cameras at the
same time.
Making Initial Camera Settings
1
Connect the camera and computer to the network and turn on the power.
2
Double-click the [Camera Management Tool] icon on the desktop.
3
Enter the factory default password (“camera”) into [Administrator Password] and click [OK].
Camera Setup
2
37
The [Basic Camera Settings] dialog box appears.
(1) [IPv4 Address Setting Method]
Select the method for setting the IPv4 address.
If [Manual] is selected, directly enter values that suit the environment in which the camera is used.
If [Auto (DHCP)] is selected, the value automatically acquired from the DHCP server will be entered in [IPv4
Address], [Subnet Mask] and [IPv4 Default Gateway Address].
(2) [IPv4 Address]
If you selected [IPv4 Address Setting Method] > [Manual], enter a fixed IPv4 address.
(3) [Subnet Mask]
If you selected [IPv4 Address Setting Method] > [Manual], enter the designated subnet mask values for each
network.
(4) [Enter a default gateway address]
Select this to manually set the default gateway address.
1
Click the [Search Camera] icon.
2
Detected cameras will appear in the camera list.
3
Select a camera in the camera list and click the [Basic Camera Settings] icon.
4
Set each of the [Network] items.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
38
(5) [IPv4 Default Gateway Address]
Be sure to set this if you select [IPv4 Address Setting Method] > [Manual] and connect to the camera with a
different subnet than that of the viewer.
(6) [AutoIP]
Select this to enable or disable AutoIP.
(7) [IPv4 Address (AutoIP)]
When [Enable] is selected for [AutoIP], an automatically set IPv4 address is displayed.
The camera will restart and the settings will take effect.
When you click [OK], other settings in ([Password], [Date and Time], [Camera], [Video]) [Basic Camera Settings]
will also take effect.
Set the Password, Date and Time, Camera Name and Video
Set basic camera information, such as the camera name, administrator password and date.
Once you have entered information for each item, click [OK].
Password Setting
Click [Password] and set the administrator password.
5
Click [OK].
Important
To ensure system security, be sure to change the administrator password. Do not forget the new password.
Camera Setup
2
39
Date and Time Settings
Click [Date and Time] and make settings such as the camera date and time setting method, time zone, and daylight
saving time.
For details on each item, please refer to “Setting” (P. 69) in “Set the Date/Time”.
Camera Name Setting
Click [Camera] and set the camera name displayed in the viewers and other software.
For setting details, please refer to “Camera Name” (P. 75) in “Set General Camera Controls”.
40
Video Settings
Click [Video] and configure the size and quality settings of the video transmitted from the camera.
For setting details, please refer to “Set Video Size and Quality [Basic Settings] > [Video Settings]” (P. 72).
Registering Camera’s IP Address to Trusted Sites
With Internet Explorer 9 or later and Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2012, Internet Explorer’s security level for
Internet and intranet sites is set to [High] by default.
As a result, it may be necessary to register the camera’s IP address as a trusted site to access the Admin Viewer/VB Viewer,
Setting Page or Admin Tools.
A confirmation message appears.
The camera will be registered as a trusted site for Internet Explorer.
Note
The registered information will be loaded when Internet Explorer is restarted. Close and restart Internet Explorer if it is running.
1
Select a camera from the camera list.
2
Click [Maintenance] menu > [Add to Trusted Sites].
3
Click [OK].
Camera Setup
2
41
When camera installation and initial settings are complete, access the camera with the Camera Management Tool and
check if video can be viewed properly.
Access the Top Page from Camera Management Tool
You can use the Camera Management Tool to launch the camera top page.
The web browser will start and the camera top page appears.
Note
• The web browser will not start when [Connection Status] for a camera is [Not connectable].
• You can also launch the camera top page by entering the IP address configured with the Camera Management Tool (P. 37)
directly into the web browser.
• If the camera top page does not launch, please refer to “Troubleshooting” (P. 254).
Top Page
From the top page of the camera, you can navigate to the Setting Page to configure various camera settings, launch Admin
Tools, and access Viewers to view video.
(1) Language Button
Access the Top Page of the Camera to Check Video
1
Launch the Camera Management Tool (P. 36)
2
Double-click the IPv4 address of a camera in the camera list to launch its top page.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
42
Click to switch the display language.
(2) [Setting Page]
Displays the Setting Page (P. 60).
You can make initial camera settings and settings to suit how the camera will be used.
(3) [Admin Tools]
Displays the Admin Tools top page (P. 193).
You can launch various tools for making settings, such as for using the camera, or launch a utility for managing
recorded video.
(4) [Admin Viewer]
Launches the Admin Viewer (P. 43).
(5) [VB Viewer]
Launches the VB Viewer (P. 43).
User Authentication
When you use the Setting Page, Admin Tools or Admin Viewer, an authentication screen appears, and you are
prompted to enter a user name and password.
If you enter the wrong user name or password, you will not be able to connect to the camera. Enter the correct user
name and password and connect to the camera.
The factory default user name and password are:
User Name: root
Password: camera
The user name “root” is the administrator account for the camera.
Note
• Only administrators can connect to a camera using the Setting Page and Admin Tools.
• Authorized users with camera control privileges can also connect using Admin Viewer. You can set the user privileges of
registered users with [Security] > [User Restrictions] > [User Authority] on the Setting Page (P. 118).
Important
• To ensure system security, be sure to change the administrator password. Do not forget the new password.
• Restore factory default settings if you have forgotten the administrator password (P. 270). Note that this will reset all camera
settings to factory default settings except for date and time.
• If you connect to the camera using the administrator account, it will not be possible to connect with administrator privileges from
a different computer.
• If the administrator and an authorized user share the VB Viewer on the same computer, it is strongly recommended that the
[Remember my credentials] check box be cleared.
• The Admin Tools and the Admin Viewer cannot be used if an IPv6 address is specified. Only host names are supported for IPv6
connections.
Authentication Screen for Setting Page Authentication Screen for Admin Tools/Admin Viewer
Camera Setup
2
43
• Depending on the security settings in Internet Explorer, the blocked content dialog box may appear when attempting to access
the Setting Page, Admin Tools or the Viewers when using the camera with Internet Explorer 9 or later, or on Windows Server 2008/
Windows Server 2012. If this happens, click [Add] to register the camera IP address as a trusted site.
Checking Camera Video
Check the camera video with a viewer. VB Viewer and Admin Viewer are available.
This section only explains how to launch a viewer for checking video. For details on how to use each Viewer, please refer to
“Admin Viewer/VB Viewer” (P. 137).
Note
If the blocked content dialog box appears when you launch a viewer, click [Add] in the dialog box to register the camera’s IP address as a
trusted site.
Viewing Video With VB Viewer
VB Viewer allows any user with camera access to use the camera. The user, however, is restricted to a limited set of
functions.
When you click [VB Viewer] on the top page, the VB Viewer launches and displays the camera video.
Viewing Video With Admin Viewer
The Admin Viewer can only be used by administrators and registered users with camera control privilege. It allows
complete control of the camera.
The user authentication window appears.
1
Click [Admin Viewer] on the top page.
44
The Admin Viewer launches and displays the camera video.
2
Enter a user name and password (P. 42) and click [OK].
Chapter
Camera Angle Setting Tool
After installing the camera, connect to it with the Camera Angle Setting Tool and view the displayed video to
make settings, such as the camera angle, focus and exposure.
M641
M640
M741
M740
46
The Camera Angle Setting Tool allows you to view displayed video on a computer to make settings, such as the camera
angle and focus.
Use this to adjust the camera during installation or if the camera has been moved from its original position.
The following gives an overview of the settings that can be made with the Camera Angle Setting Tool.
Pan, Tilt, Rotation, Zoom, Focus, Image Flip
Zoom, Focus, Image Flip
Launch the Camera Angle Setting Tool
Double-click the [Camera Angle Setting Tool] icon on the desktop to launch it.
Note
You can also launch the Camera Angle Setting Tool from the Camera Management Tool. For details, please refer to the “Camera
Management Tool User Manual”.
Connect to the Camera
Use the Camera Angle Setting Tool to select the camera on which you want to set the camera angle.
There are two methods for connecting to the camera.
• Specify camera information.
• Use a Camera Specification File (P. 56)
Launch the Camera Angle Setting Tool and Connect to a
Camera
Important
• The Camera Angle Setting Tool is for use when installing the camera. Do not use on a daily basis. Frequent use may result in camera
malfunction.
• After changing settings with the Camera Angle Setting Tool, make sure that the settings made with the Setting Page and Admin Tools
function correctly.
• The Camera Angle Setting Tool cannot be used via a proxy server.
• The upload function cannot be used while the Camera Angle Setting Tool is connected.
Important
• Connections to a single camera are limited to 30 minutes. If the connection is closed because you exceeded the time limit before you
completed camera angle settings, reconnect to the camera.
• Multiple computers cannot simultaneously connect to the same camera using the Camera Angle Setting Tool.
M641 M640
M741
M740
Camera Angle Setting Tool
3
47
Connect by Specifying Camera Information
The [Connection settings] dialog box appears.
(1) [Host Name]
Enter the host name or IP address of the camera (P. 37).
(2) [Administrator User Name]
Enter the administrator user name for the camera (P. 42).
(3) [Administrator Password]
Enter the administrator password for the camera (P. 42).
(4) [Enable SSL Communications]
Select this to connect to the camera using SSL communication.
Normally, disabling SSL communication (the factory default setting) is not an issue (P. 123).
(5) [Port]
Set the HTTP port number to 80, 443 or a value in the range of 1024 to 65535.
Normally use [80] (factory default setting) (P. 89).
A confirmation message will appear.
Note
Connecting to the camera with the Camera Angle Setting Tool will disconnect connections to that camera from Viewers and
recording software, except for those connecting via RTP.
You will connect to the camera and live video from it will appear.
1
Click [File] menu > [Connect].
2
Enter the connection settings for the camera.
3
Click [OK].
4
Click [Yes].
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
48
Use a Camera Specification File for Connecting
You can connect to a camera by loading camera information listed in a camera specification file (P. 56).
The [Select Camera] dialog box appears.
The camera specification file will be loaded and the camera name will appear in [Camera List].
1
Click [File] menu > [Select Camera].
2
Click [Load camera specification file].
3
Select a camera specification file and click [Open].
Camera Angle Setting Tool
3
49
You will connect to the camera.
Connect to the Next Camera
After setting the camera angle, click [Next] to connect to the next camera.
You will be disconnected from the current camera and connected to the next camera appearing in the list.
Note
• The [Select Camera] dialog box will continue to display until you close the Camera Angle Setting Tool or click the X in the upper
right corner of the dialog box.
• The camera list will be discarded when the Camera Angle Setting Tool is closed. Load the camera specification file the next time
you launch the Camera Angle Setting Tool.
Disconnect from the Camera and Close the Software
Once you have completed setting the camera angle, follow the steps below to disconnect from the camera and close the
Camera Angle Setting Tool. Note that camera angle settings will be lost if you turn the camera on/off without performing
these steps.
4
Select a camera to connect to and click [Connect].
Next camera
50
You will disconnect from the camera.
The Camera Angle Setting Tool will close.
1
Click [File] menu > [Disconnect].
2
Click [File] menu > [Exit].
Camera Angle Setting Tool
3
51
(1) Video Display Area
Camera video appears here.
(2) [Switch Screen Size] Button
Switch the Camera Angle Setting Tool screen between small and large sizes.
You can select the screen size with [Display] menu > [Display screen size].
(3) Control Assist Display
Display dotted lines indicating the possible ranges for panning and tilting.
Camera Angle Setting Tool Screen
M641 M640
(11)
(12)
(13)
(4)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(2)
(6)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)(7) (10) (9) (8)
M741 M740
(1)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(8)
(2)
(10) (9) (8)
M641 M640
52
(4) [Pan] Buttons
Pan the camera.
(5) [Tilt] Buttons
Tilt the camera.
(6) [Rotation] Buttons
Rotate the camera.
(7) [Rotation] Slider
Click on the slider or drag the slider to rotate the camera angle.
(8) [Zoom] Buttons
Zoom the camera.
(9) [Zoom] Slider
Click on the slider or drag the slider to zoom the camera.
(10) Optical telephoto end icon
Appears when [Digital Zoom] > [Enable] has been selected. Digital zoom is used when dragging the slider
above this icon.
(11) [Control Assist Display] Selection Menu
Select whether or not to display control assistance in the video display area.
(12) [Control Button Display] Selection Menu
Select whether or not to display pan and tilt control buttons in the video display area.
(13) [Control Assist Correction] Button
If you click this when the displayed control assistance does not match the actual camera angle, the actual
camera angle will be confirmed and the position of the displayed control assistance automatically corrected.
Correction takes approximately one minute.
(14) [Digital Zoom]
Select whether or not to use digital zoom.
If you select [Enable], the digital zoom range will appear on the zoom slider and you will be able to use digital
zoom.
The higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the video quality.
(15) [Image Flip] Selection Menu
Select the orientation of the camera video.
If [Enable] is selected, the video is displayed rotated 180 degrees.
(16) [Image Stabilizer]
Select this to reduce blur in video due to camera vibration.
If there is still blur after selecting [On1], select [On2].
The angle of view will be narrower and the video noisier when using stabilization compared to when it is not
used.
(17) [Focus]
Focus the camera (P. 54).
(18) [Exposure Compensation] Slider
Adjust exposure to suit the brightness of subjects (P. 55).
Important
• Stabilization will not affect blurring of subjects.
• Stabilization is not effective beyond a certain degree of vibration or for momentary vibrations.
• If you select [On2], it is recommended selecting a video reception size less than 640 × 480.
• If you use stabilization, please refer to the information listed in the following “Important” sections.
– The “Important” section in “View Restriction Setting Tool” (P. 207).
– The “Important” section in “View Video With Admin Viewer” (P. 143).
– The “Important” section in “Register Presets” (P. 170).
M641 M640
M641 M640
M641
M640
M641
M640
M641
M640
M641 M640
M641 M640
Camera Angle Setting Tool
3
53
After connecting to the camera, view the displayed video to make settings, such as the camera angle and zoom.
Set the Camera Angle and Zoom
You can set the camera angle and zoom using the video display area or buttons.
Make Settings with the Operation Buttons and Sliders
You can set the camera angle with the [Pan], [Tilt] and [Rotation] buttons.
While you push a button, the camera angle will change in that direction. When you release the button, the camera
angle will stop.
If you rotate the camera angle using the [Rotation] slider, release the mouse button when the video display area is
horizontal.
Set Camera Angle by Clicking Video
If you click anywhere in the video display area, the camera angle will change to center on that location.
If you click outside the pan or tilt range, however, the camera angle will only change for the one which is within its
range.
Note
If the camera moves differently than the intended operation, or if settings in the full range displayed by control assist cannot be
made, control assist may be out of alignment with the actual camera angle. If this happens, reset the camera angle after clicking
[Control Assist Correction].
Set the Camera Angle
Important
You will have to reconfigure Intelligent Function detection area settings, privacy mask settings, or preset settings you have already made
on a camera, if you change settings on that camera with the Camera Angle Setting Tool.
M641
M640
Pans left or right.
Tilts up or down.
Rotates.
M641
M640
54
Change the Camera Zoom Ratio
You can change the zoom ratio of the camera with the [Zoom] buttons or [Zoom] slider.
Operation will continue while you hold a [Zoom] button down and stop when you release it.
If you drag the slider handle, the camera zoom ratio will change according to the position on the slider.
If you select [Digital Zoom] > [Enable], the maximum optical telephoto icon and digital zoom range will appear and
you will be able to use digital zoom.
The higher the digital zoom ratio, however, the lower the video quality becomes.
Set the Focus and Exposure Compensation
This focuses on the subject. Adjust exposure to suit the brightness of subjects.
Note
The exposure compensation value set with the Camera Angle Setting Tool will be reset when the camera is rebooted.
Set the Focus
You can automatically or manually focus on subjects, or set focus to infinity. You can use One-shot AF to focus on
subjects manually.
(1) [Auto]
Automatically focuses on the subject.
(2) [Manual]
Use buttons ((4) and (5)) to manually adjust focus.
(3) [Fixed at Infinity]
Fixes the focus near infinity.
(4) [One-shot AF]
Use when the focus mode is set to [Manual]. When you click this, it will focus once using autofocus and then
switch to manual focus.
(5) Far and Near Buttons
Use to adjust focus when the focus mode is set to [Manual].
Focus will change while you hold the buttons down and stop when you release them.
Zooms in.
Zooms out.
Digital Zoom Range
Optical telephoto end icon
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Camera Angle Setting Tool
3
55
Note
• Focusing may be difficult for the following types of subjects when using [Auto] or [One-shot AF].
Difficult to Focus Subjects
• It is recommended that you check that the camera is focused whenever you restart the camera or use One-shot
AF.
• The focus ranges (approximate) are shown in the table below.
* Using infrared illumination from an external device may throw the camera out of focus.
Set the Exposure Compensation
Set the video brightness.
Focuses further away.
Focuses nearer.
Focus Mode
Day/Night Settings
Day mode Night mode
Auto/Manual 0.3 m (12 in.) – infinity 0.3 m (12 in.) – infinity
Fixed at Infinity Fixed near infinity*
A white wall or other subject
lacking bright/dark contrast
A slanting
subject
A subject reflecting
strong light
A subject consisting of only
slant lines or horizontal stripes
A subject having no form,
such as flame or smoke
A subject seen
through glass
A fast moving
subject
A dark area or
night view
Subjects both
near and far
56
If you create a camera specification file listing the information needed to connect to cameras beforehand, you can load the
file with the Camera Angle Setting Tool and connect to cameras that appear in the camera list simply by specifying them.
When you set the camera angle of multiple cameras, this eliminates the need to enter information, such as the host name
and password, of each camera individually.
Create a Camera Specification File
Create the camera specification file with an editor like the text editor and save the file as .csv format.
Information Listed in a Camera Specification File
The camera specification file consists of the following format.
The first row serves as a header row listing the titles of each column.
Each row from the second row on, lists the information for one camera per row.
The information listed in each column is described below.
Use a Camera Specification File
Important
Enter the actual administrator passwords in the camera specification file. Handle the camera specification file with sufficient care.
Important
The maximum number of cameras that can be listed in a camera specification file is 30. An error will be generated if you try to load a file
with the Camera Angle Setting Tool listing 31 or more cameras.
Header
Row
RegisterName HostName PortNumber UserName Password ConnectType
Individual
Camera
Information
(Max. 30
Cameras)
B1F VB-M641VE 192.168.100.1 80 root camera1 0
1Fa VB-M640VE 192.168.100.2 80 root camera2 0
1Fb VB-M641V 192.168.100.3 80 root camera3 0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Header Row Title Information Listed in Column
RegisterName Enter any camera name. This will appear in the camera list when connected.
HostName Host name or IP address of the camera.
PortNumber HTTP port number for the camera (default setting is 80).
UserName Administrator user name for the camera (default setting is “root”).
Password Administrator password for the camera (default setting is “camera”).
ConnectType
Enable SSL communications: 1
Disable SSL communications: 0 (default setting is 0).
Camera Angle Setting Tool
3
57
Example Using a Text Editor for Entry
Enter each item separated by a comma. Give the file the .csv extension and save it.
RegisterName,HostName,PortNumber,UserName,Password,ConnectType
B1F VB-M641VE,192.168.100.1,80,root,camera1,0
1Fa VB-M640VE,192.168.100.2,80,root,camera2,0
1Fb VB-M641V,192.168.100.3,80,root,camera3,0
2Fa VB-M641V,192.168.100.4,80,root,camera4,0
2Fb VB-M641V,192.168.100.5,80,root,camera5,0
3Fa VB-M741LE,192.168.100.6,80,root,camera6,0
R VB-M740E,192.168.100.7,443,root,camera7,0
Important
If you separate items with a delimiter other than a comma, such as a semicolon, the Camera Angle Setting Tool will not be able to
load the file.
58
Chapter
Setting Page
The Setting Page is used to make necessary basic settings after camera installation, such as, network, video
and security settings, and to make settings to suit the situation in which a camera will be used.
It also has the maintenance menu for the camera.
60
This section explains operation up to displaying the Setting Page, and common Setting Page operations.
Access the Setting Page
Use a web browser to access the camera’s top page to display the Setting Page.
A user authentication window appears.
The Setting Menu will appear.
Note
You can also access the Setting Page from the Camera Management Tool. For details, please refer to the “Camera Management
Tool User Manual”.
Setting Menu
(1) [Admin Viewer]
Click this button to launch Admin Viewer.
(2) [Back to top]
Click this button to navigate to the top page.
(3) Setting Menus
If you click this, a submenu (P. 62) will appear (excluding the [Memory Card], [Maintenance] and [User Page]
menus). Click the submenu to navigate to each Setting Page.
How to Use The Setting Page
1
Launch the camera top page and click [Setting Page] (P. 41).
2
Enter a user name and password (P. 42) and click [OK].
Important
• To ensure security, exit the web browser after completing settings on the Setting Page and after using Admin Viewer/Admin
Tools.
• Do not open multiple Setting Pages at one time and try to change the settings of a single camera.
(3)
(1) (2)
Setting Page
4
61
Common Setting Page Operations
This section explains basic Setting Page operations, and operations common to all Setting Pages.
Applying Changes to Settings
When a setting is changed on the Setting Page, [Apply] shown on the top right and bottom right of the Setting Page
changes from grayed-out to blue.
Click [Apply] in this state to apply the changed settings.
Click [Clear] to revert to the previous settings.
Setting Changes Requiring Rebooting
Items that require the camera to be rebooted in order to apply the changed settings are indicated with an orange
symbol to their right.
When any item indicated with an orange symbol is changed, [Apply] shown at the top right and bottom right of each
Setting Page changes to [Apply and reboot].
Click [Apply and reboot] to apply the changed settings and reboot the camera.
Click [Clear] to revert to the previous settings.
Return to the Setting Menu
Click [Settings menu] at the top right of each Setting Page to return to the top menu.
Help
Click [Help] at the beginning of any setting item to display a detailed explanation of that setting item.
Setting Ranges and Character Limits
For settings where you enter numerical values or characters, the setting range or character limits that can be entered
will be displayed.
Please enter the settings within the displayed limits.
Important
Setting changes will be lost if you navigate to another Setting Page without clicking [Apply] or [Apply and reboot]. Be sure to click
[Apply] or [Apply and reboot] to apply the changed settings.
Important
Do not use the [Back] or [Forward] button in the web browser to navigate Setting Pages. The changed settings may revert to the
original settings or unwanted setting changes may be applied.
62
About Each Setting Page
This section will give an overview of each item in Setting Menu and each list of submenus.
Each of the [Basic Settings], [Video and Audio]/[Video], and [Video Record] menus has a [Video Settings] submenu, but
the functions are all common. The functions can be set in any of the menus and the settings will be reflected in all of the
[Video Settings] submenus.
• Network (P. 64)
Network settings for connecting to the camera.
• Password (P. 68)
Use this to change the administrator password from the
default password.
• Date and Time (P. 69)
Camera date and time settings.
• Video Settings (P. 72)
General video settings, such as the size and quality of
video transmitted from the camera.
Basic Settings
Camera
Video and Audio
R11
M641
M741
Video
R10
M640
M740
Server
• Camera Settings (P. 75)
Settings for the camera name and external input/output
devices, and for camera use and installation settings.
•Initial Setting (P. 79)
Sets initial settings, such as video quality compensation, at
camera start up.
• Video Settings (P. 72)
•ADSR (P. 82)
ADSR is an abbreviation for Area-specific Data Size
Reduction.
Reduces the size of transmitted H.264 video by reducing
the video quality of unspecified area.
• On-screen Display (P. 85)
Displays the date and time, camera name and other UI
strings on the Viewer.
• Audio Settings (P. 87)
Settings for audio input from the microphone connected to
the camera and audio output from the Viewer.
R11
M641
M741
• Server Settings (P. 89)
Settings for HTTP server, SNMP server, FTP server usage
or WS-Security time checks.
• Video Server (P. 91)
Settings for clients that can be connected to a video
server.
• Audio Server (P. 92)
Settings for audio transmission from the camera to the
computer, and audio reception from the computer to the
camera.
•RTP Server (P. 93)
Settings for RTP streaming.
R11
M641
M741
Setting Page
4
63
• Video Settings (P. 72)
• Upload (P. 96)
Settings for uploading video via HTTP or FTP when an
event is triggered.
• Memory Card (P. 101)
Settings for recording video to a memory card when an
event is triggered.
The settings of this item are the same as those of the
[Memory Card] menu. The settings can be made with
either of them.
• E-mail Notification (P. 102)
Settings for sending an e-mail notification to a specified
recipient when an event is triggered.
Video Record
Event
Security
Memory Card (P. 130)
Maintenance (P. 134)
• External Device (P. 104)
Operation settings for external device output and for
external device input triggered events.
• Audio Settings (P. 87)
The settings of this item are the same as those of [Video
and Audio] > [Audio Settings].
• Audio Detection (P. 107)
Detected changes in audio input from the microphone
connected to the camera can trigger operations such as
video recording or e-mail notification.
•Timer (P.110)
The timer function can generate events that can trigger
operations, such as video recording and e-mail
notifications, at regular intervals.
• Switch Day/Night (P. 112)
The camera angle can be moved to preset positions when
events cause Day Mode and Night Mode to switch.
• Linked Event (P. 113)
By linking two types of events, a single event is triggered.
R11
M641
M741
R11
M641
M741
R11
M641
M741
R11
M641
M741
• User Restrictions (P. 118)
Used for adding new authorized users that can access the
Admin Viewer, and for setting permissions for users.
• Host Restrictions (P. 119)
Separate access control from IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
can be set.
• SSL/TLS (P. 121)
Certificate creation, administrative settings and encrypted
communication settings.
• 802.1X (P. 124)
Settings for 802.1X authentication and authentication
status display, and for certificate administration.
•IPsec (P.126)
Settings for using IPsec.
Perform memory card operations or configure settings.
Check logs or settings, or perform camera maintenance.
User Page
Link to web page customized by the user.
For information on the User Page, contact a Canon Customer Service Center.
64
Network settings for connecting to the camera.
LAN
Set the LAN communication method and size of video transmitted from the camera.
[LAN Interface]
Select the interface suited to the device for connecting to the camera. Generally use [Auto].
[Maximum Packet Size]
Enter the maximum packet size to be transmitted by the camera. Normally there is no need to change the default setting of
1500.
A setting of 1280 or greater is necessary when using IPv6.
When using ADSL, setting a slightly lower value may increase transmission efficiency.
IPv4
Settings for using IPv4 to connect to the camera. The IPv4 address can be assigned by the DHCP server automatically or
set manually.
[IPv4 Address Setting Method]
Select the method for setting the IPv4 address.
Configure Network Settings
[Basic Settings] > [Network]
Important
If any network settings are changed, the camera may become inaccessible from the active web browser. If this occurs, a confirmation
dialog box will appear when you click [Apply] or [Apply and reboot]. Click [OK] to apply the new settings.
If you reboot the camera after changing settings and cannot connect to the camera from the web browser, any available URI for
connecting to the camera will be displayed in a message. If you cannot connect to the camera through the displayed URI, contact your
system administrator.
Important
• Contact your System Administrator for the [IPv4 Address], [Subnet Mask] and [IPv4 Default Gateway Address] if you set the IPv4
address manually.
• If any of the [IPv4 Address], [Subnet Mask] or [IPv4 Default Gateway Address] settings are wrong, the camera may become
inaccessible via the network. If this occurs, use the Camera Management Tool to reset the address (P. 36).
Setting Page
4
65
For [Manual], enter a fixed IPv4 address into [IPv4 Address].
For [Auto (DHCP)], the settings acquired from the DHCP server will be automatically entered in [IPv4 Address], [Subnet
Mask] and [IPv4 Default Gateway Address].
[IPv4 Address]
When [IPv4 Address Setting Method] is set to [Manual], enter a fixed IPv4 address.
The IP address cannot start with 127., such as 127.0.0.1.
[Subnet Mask]
When [IPv4 Address Setting Method] is set to [Manual], enter the designated subnet mask values for each network.
[IPv4 Default Gateway Address]
When [IPv4 Address Setting Method] is set to [Manual], enter a default gateway IP address. Be sure to set this when
connecting the camera to a different subnet from that of the Viewer.
[AutoIP]
Select this to enable or disable AutoIP.
[IPv4 Address (AutoIP)]
When [AutoIP] is set to [Enable], an automatically set IPv4 address is displayed.
IPv6
Settings for using IPv6 to connect to the camera. The IPv6 address can be assigned by the RA or DHCPv6 server
automatically or set manually.
[IPv6]
Select this to enable or disable IPv6.
[Auto (RA)]
Select [Enable] to set an address automatically using RA (Router Advertisement, network information automatically
transmitted from a router).
[Auto (DHCPv6)]
Select [Enable] to use DHCPv6 to set an address automatically.
Important
If [Auto (DHCP)] is selected as the IPv4 address setting method, the IPv4 address may not be assigned correctly in certain environments,
such as when a router is present between the DHCP server and the camera. If this occurs, select [Manual] and enter a fixed IPv4
address.
Important
Contact your System Administrator for the [IPv6 Address], [Prefix Length] and [IPv6 Default Gateway Address] if you set the IPv6 address
manually.
66
[IPv6 Address (Manual)]
Enter a fixed IPv6 address if you set the address manually.
[Prefix Length]
Enter a prefix length if [Disable] is specified in [Auto (RA)].
[IPv6 Default Gateway Address]
Enter a default gateway address if [Disable] is specified in [Auto (RA)]. Be sure to set this when connecting the camera to a
different subnet from that of the Viewer.
[IPv6 Address (Auto)]
If [Enable] is specified in [IPv6] and [Enable] is specified in [Auto (RA)] and [Auto (DHCPv6)], then the automatically
acquired address will be shown.
Note
In an environment where IPv6 cannot be used, and IPv6/Auto is set to [Enable], then only the link-local address will be displayed in the
[IPv6 Address (Auto)] field.
DNS
Set the DNS server address. The DNS server address can be set manually or automatically assigned by a DHCP/DHCPv6
server.
[Name Server Address 1], [Name Server Address 2]
Enter the name server address you want to register. To register only one address, keep the [Name Server Address 2] field
blank.
You must set at least one if you manually set the IPv4 address or IPv6 address.
Note
If [Name Server Address 1] is unavailable, [Name Server Address 2] will be accessed. However, [Name Server Address 2] must be set in
advance.
[Auto-Setting of Name Server Address]
Select the server to use for automatically setting the name server address.
To set [Use DHCP], select [Auto (DHCP)] in [IPv4 Address Setting Method] (P. 64).
To set [Use DHCPv6], select [Enable] in [IPv6], then select [Enable] in [Auto (DHCPv6)] (P. 65).
[Name Server Address (DHCP)]
Select [Use DHCP] or [Use DHCP/DHCPv6] in [Auto-Setting of Name Server Address] to display the name server address
acquired from the DHCP server.
[Name Server Address (DHCPv6)]
Select [Use DHCPv6] or [Use DHCP/DHCPv6] in [Auto-Setting of Name Server Address] to display the name server
address acquired from the DHCPv6 server.
Setting Page
4
67
[Host Name]
You can register the camera host name in name server using alphanumeric characters.
Do not use “_” (underscore) in the host name in Internet Explorer 8/9/10/11.
[Host Name Registration with DDNS]
When you enter a name into [Host Name] and select [Enable], the host name will be registered in the name server.
Registering the host name to DDNS is useful when operating with [IPv4 Address Setting Method] set to [Auto (DHCP)]
(P. 64). DNS server registration settings must be set in advance. Contact your system administrator for the DNS server
settings.
[Search Domain]
Enter a domain name and click [Add] to add the domain name to the Search Domain List.
Specify the host name without specifying a domain name for a server, such as the upload server, to search domains in the
form “host name + domain name”, where the domain names are specified in the Search Domain List.
Do not use “_” (underscore) in the domain name in Internet Explorer 8/9/10/11.
[Search Domain List]
A list of domain names added using [Search Domain].
The function queries the DNS server for each domain name starting from the top of the list.
Use the ▲▼ buttons on the right to change the order of the domain names.
To delete a domain name, select one from the list and then click [Delete].
mDNS
This will configure settings for using multicast DNS. If you use mDNS, the IP address and host name of the camera will be
broadcast to other hosts on the network.
[Use mDNS]
Select this to enable or disable mDNS.
68
In order to prevent users, other than administrators, from changing the system, change the administrator password from the
default password.
Administrator Password
Change the administrator password.
[Password]
Enter the administrator password in alphanumeric characters (spaces or printable characters).
The factory default setting is “camera”.
If the Admin Viewer, Admin Tools, etc., are connected, terminate the connection before changing the password.
[Confirm Password]
Enter the same password as above for confirmation.
Set the Administrator Password
[Basic Settings] > [Password]
Important
• To ensure system security, be sure to change the administrator password. Do not forget the new password.
• Press the reset switch to restore factory default settings if you have forgotten the administrator password (P. 270). Note, however, that
this will reset all camera settings to factory default settings except for date and time.
Setting Page
4
69
Camera date and time settings.
Current Date and Time
The date and time set in the camera are shown.
Setting
Set the date and time setting method, time zone and daylight saving time for the camera.
[Setting Method]
Select the date and time setting method.
The settings are configured as follows depending on the setting configured in [Setting Method].
[Set manually]
Set the desired date and time in [Date] and [Time].
Set the time in 24-hour format in <hour:minute:second> order.
[Synchronize with NTP server]
Select the setting method displayed in [Auto-Setting of NTP Server].
[Not used]
Enter the IP address or host name of the NTP server in [NTP Server].
Set the Date/Time
[Basic Settings] > [Date and Time]
70
[Use DHCP]
The camera time is synchronized with the time of the NTP server at the address acquired from the DHCP server. The
acquired NTP server address appears in [NTP Server (DHCP)].
In order to set [Use DHCP], you must change [Network] > [IPv4] > [IPv4 Address Setting Method] to [Auto (DHCP)]
(P. 64).
[Use DHCPv6]
The camera time is synchronized with the time of the NTP server at the address acquired from the DHCPv6 server.
The acquired NTP server address appears in [NTP Server (DHCPv6)].
In order to set [Use DHCPv6], you must change [Network] > [IPv6] > [Use IPv6] to [Enable], then set [Auto
(DHCPv6)] to [Enable] (P. 65).
[Use DHCP/DHCPv6]
The camera time is synchronized with the time of the NTP server at the address acquired from the DHCP server or
DHCPv6 server.
If the NTP server (address) can be acquired from both the DHCP server (IPv4) and DHCPv6 server, the NTP server
address acquired from the DHCP server (IPv4) will be used.
[Synchronize with NTP broadcast]
The camera will synchronize time with NTP broadcasts received from the NTP server.
The camera’s NTP broadcast mode does not support IPv6.
[Synchronize with computer time]
The date and time will be synchronized with that of the computer currently accessing the camera. After clicking [Apply],
[Setting Method] will change to [Set manually].
[Time Zone] is not automatically selected, so set it if necessary.
Note
• If the NTP server IP address is incorrect or a connection with the NTP server cannot otherwise be established, the date and time will not
be changed.
Setting Page
4
71
• The NTP server query interval is 300 seconds. Synchronization will take time if the time difference is large.
[Time Zone]
Select the appropriate time zone.
If the time zone is changed, the date and time display will update automatically according to the specified time zone.
[Daylight Saving Time]
Select whether or not to automatically adjust for daylight saving time to suit the time zone.
72
General video settings, such as the size and quality of JPEG and H.264 video transmitted from the camera.
All Videos
Set the video size sets used by the camera.
All options in the [Video Settings] submenu and the size sets that can be selected in [Video Size] in all of the Setting Pages
are determined by the video size set selected here.
This also determines the video sizes and screen sizes that can be selected by each Viewer.
[Video Size Set]
Categories and aspect ratios vary according to each video size set.
JPEG
You can configure settings for the quality and size of JPEG video transmitted from the camera, as well as, the video size
when recording the camera video.
The video sizes that can be set or selected depend on the [Video Size Set] setting.
Set Video Size and Quality
[Basic Settings] > [Video Settings]
Important
• This [Video Settings] submenu is common with the [Video Settings] submenu found in [Video and Audio] or [Video], and [Video
Record]. A setting configured in any of the [Video Settings] submenus will be reflected in the other [Video Settings] submenus.
• The following may occur if video size, video quality and target bit rate are set higher, as this increases network load and data size per
frame.
– JPEG: The frame rate may drop
– H.264: Video may be temporarily disrupted
• In case of H.264 video, block noise may become noticeable if a large video size and low target bit rate are set.
• The data size may increase depending on the type or movement of the subject. If the frame rate remains low or other undesirable
conditions continue for a prolonged period, lower the video size or quality setting.
• The included RM-Lite can only record JPEG video.
[Video Size Set] Category Aspect Ratio
[1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 / 320 x 180] 720p 16:9
[1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 / 320 x 240] 4:3 4:3
Important
Changing the [Video Size Set] selection and clicking [Apply and reboot] will disconnect all connections and then change all the video
sizes. Consequently, users connected to the camera must reconnect.
If the [Video Size Set] selection is changed, review the following settings and check the operation.
–ADSR
– Privacy Mask settings
– Intelligent Function settings
– Present Setting
– View Restriction settings
– Camera Angle Setting Tool
R11
R10
M641
M640
M741 M740
Setting Page
4
73
[Video Quality]
Select the video quality transmitted from the camera for each size in a video size set.
Greater values have higher quality.
[Video Quality: Digital PTZ]
Select the video quality for digital PTZ.
[Video Size: Video Transmission]
Select the default video size transmitted from the camera when no video size has been specified by the Viewer.
[Maximum Frame Rate: Video Transmission]
Limit the maximum frame rate per second transmitted to reduce the viewer load. Up to 30 frames per second can be set.
[Video Size: Upload/Memory card]
Select the size of video when using the upload function (P. 96) or when recording to a memory card (P. 101).
Set whether to upload a video or record it to a memory card with [Video Record] > [Upload] or [Memory Card] > [Video
Record Action] (P. 96).
H.264(1)
Settings for H.264(1) video transmitted from the camera.
Configure settings here for using H.264 video for upload or memory card recording. H.264(2) video cannot be used for
upload or memory card recording.
H.264(1) video can be displayed using Admin Viewer and RM-Lite Viewer. It cannot be displayed using VB Viewer.
The video sizes that can be selected depend on the [Video Size Set] setting.
[Video Size]
Select the size of the video transmitted from the camera.
[Bit Rate Control]
Set the video bit rate.
If you select [Use bit rate control], please set [Target Bit Rate (kbps)]. If you select [Do not use bit rate control], please set
[Video Quality].
[Target Bit Rate (kbps)]
You can select the target bit rate if [Bit Rate Control] is set to [Use bit rate control].
M641
M640
M741
M740
74
[Video Quality]
You can select the video quality if [Bit Rate Control] is set to [Do not use bit rate control].
Greater values have higher quality.
[Frame Rate (fps)]
Select the video frame rate.
[I Frame Interval (sec)]
Select the I frame interval (sec) for H.264 video.
H.264(2)
Settings for H.264(2) video transmitted from the camera.
H.264(2) video can be displayed using Admin Viewer and RM-Lite Viewer. It cannot be used for upload, memory card
recording, or by VB Viewer.
The video sizes that can be selected depend on the [Video Size Set] setting.
[H.264(2)]
Select [Enable] to dual stream H.264 video.
[Video Size], [Bit Rate Control], [Target Bit Rate (kbps)], [Video Quality], [Frame Rate (fps)], [I Frame Interval (sec)]
Please refer to each setting in “H.264(1)”.
Important
• When [H.264(1)] is used for memory card recording and upload, the following restrictions apply to the [H.264(1)] setting.
– [Bit Rate Control]: [Use bit rate control] only
– [Target Bit Rate (kbps)]: [3072] or less
– [I Frame Interval (sec)]: either [0.5], [1], or [1.5]
• The included RM-Lite cannot record H.264 video.
Important
• When dual streaming H.264 videos, setting the video size for H.264(1) and H.264(2) to the following combinations restricts the frame
rate to a maximum of 15 fps. For all other combinations, a frame rate of up to 30 fps can be selected.
• The included RM-Lite cannot record H.264 video.
H.264(1) H.264(2)
1280 x 960 1280 x 960
1280 x 720 1280 x 720
Setting Page
4
75
Settings for the camera name and external input/output devices, and for camera use and installation settings.
Camera Name
Set the camera name.
[Camera Name]
Enter any camera name. Be sure to enter a name in [Camera Name (alphanumeric characters)].
Camera Control
Set various controls to ease viewing of video.
[Digital Zoom]
Select this to enable or disable digital zoom.
If [Enable] is selected, the digital zoom telephoto end icon will appear next to the zoom slider in the Viewer (P. 148).
Unlike optical zoom, the higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the video quality.
[Image Stabilizer]
Select this to enable or disable blur reduction in video due to camera vibration.
If there is still blur after selecting [On1], select [On2].
The angle of view will be narrower and video noisier when using stabilization compared to when it is not used.
[AGC Limit]
Select the Auto Gain Control (AGC) limit value for increasing gain to brighten video in low light conditions.
The greater the value, the higher the sensitivity will become, but video noise will increase.
Set General Camera Controls
[Camera] > [Camera Settings]
Important
• The image stabilizer is not effective when the subject is shaking.
• Stabilization is not effective beyond a certain degree of vibration or for momentary vibrations.
• If you select [On2], It is recommended to select a video reception size less than [640 x 480].
• If you use stabilization, please refer to the information listed in the following “Important” sections.
– The “Important” section in “View Restriction Setting Tool” (P. 207).
– The “Important” section in “View Video With Admin Viewer” (P. 143).
– The “Important” section in “Register Presets” (P. 170).
M741
R11
R10
76
[Smart Shade Control Strength (Auto)]
Select the control strength when [Smart Shade Control] (P. 80) is set to [Auto].
• [Mild]: Select if noise is noticeable.
• [Medium]: Recommended setting for Auto mode (default setting).
• [Strong]: Select to increase visibility in dark areas.
[Haze Compensation Strength (Auto)]
Select the strength of compensation when [Haze Compensation] (P. 81) is set to [Auto].
Note
When [Haze Compensation] is set to [Auto] and [Haze Compensation Strength (Auto)] is set to [Strong], contrast may be strong if the
subject is not obscured by haze. If this happens, set [Haze Compensation Strength (Auto)] to [Mild].
[Infrared Strength (Auto)]
Select the infrared illumination strength when you have selected [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)] or [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] for
[Exposure] (P. 80).
Note
• If all or part of the image appears to have a white glow, there is a possibility that a wall (even a wall not in the image) is reflecting the
infrared lighting. If this occurs, please adjust the camera angle.
• When using the infrared lighting, and there is a problem in getting the desired contrast on the object (would like the image brighter or
darker), please adjust the Exposure Compensation (P. 80) and/or the Metering Mode (P. 80).
[Pan/Tilt Speed Control]
Select the pan/tilt control mode.
If [Control by zoom position] is selected, the pan/tilt speed will be slower in telephoto, and faster in wide-angle.
Note
• Pan/Tilt Speed Control can also be set in [Control for Admin] > [Pan/Tilt Speed] (P. 148).
• If [Control by zoom position] is selected, [Control for Admin] > [Pan/Tilt Speed] will also be fixed at [Control speed by zoom position].
[Auto Flip]
Select this to enable or disable Auto Flip.
If you enable Auto Flip and tilt the camera using the video display area in the Admin Viewer/VB Viewer (P. 147), the video
will flip when the tilt angle of the camera nears 100°.
For example, if tracking a subject that passes directly under a ceiling mounted camera (tilt angle 90°), the video will flip as
the tilt angle nears 100° without the subject appearing inverted.
Note
Auto Flip may be disabled depending on the View Restriction Setting Tool settings (P. 209).
Important
• [AGC Limit] will not function if [Admin Control] > [Exposure] (P. 162) is set to [Manual] or [Auto (Flickerless)].
• Minimum subject illumination may change when [AGC Limit] is set.
M741
R11 R10
R11
R10
Setting Page
4
77
Day/Night (When Auto Is Set)
Set conditions for switching Day Mode and Night Mode when [Initial Settings] > [Day/Night] (P. 81) is set to [Auto].
[Switching Brightness]
Select the brightness for switching Day/Night Mode when [Day/Night] is set to [Auto].
Select [Darker] if you want to capture video in color as much as possible.
Select [Brighter] to reduce noise. Note that this mode switches to monochrome sooner.
[Response (sec.)]
Select the number of seconds for determining when to switch Day/Night Mode, when [Day/Night] is set to [Auto]. Day/Night
Mode switches when the brightness continues to exceed or fall below the brightness set in [Switching Brightness] within
any of the settings for the number of seconds selected.
Select [30] or [60] if brightness changes frequently, such as when a light source passes in front of the camera. Select [5] or
[10] if change in brightness is minimal.
Installation Conditions
Configure settings for camera use suitable for the location the camera will be installed.
78
[LED Setting]
Select whether to enable or disable the camera operation status LED.
The LED will light for several seconds when starting the camera even if set to [Turn Off].
[Image Flip]
Select whether or not to vertically flip the video.
Select the setting suited to the camera installation method, such as ceiling mounting or placing on a desk.
Camera Position Control
Settings for camera use when there are no camera control restrictions for users or requests for camera control privileges.
[Restricted to Presets]
Restricts camera control of the camera angle, such as with VB Viewer, to presets, including the home position, for users
other than administrators.
[Camera Position without Control]
Select the camera operation when there are no users with camera control privileges.
If [Return to Home Position] has been selected, the home position of the camera must be set in advance with [Control for
Admin] > [Preset/Initial Setting] > [Preset Setting] > [Preset Registration] tab (P. 170).
External Input Device 1, 2
Enter each device name in order to identify the corresponding external input device being connected.
There are 2 external input device terminals on the camera.
[Device Name]
Enter the name of the device connected to the external input device terminal. Be sure to enter a name in [Device Name
(alphanumeric characters)].
External Output Device 1, 2
Enter each device name in order to identify the corresponding external output device being connected.
There are 2 external output device terminals on the camera.
[Device Name]
Enter the name of the device connected to the external output device terminal. Be sure to enter a name in [Device Name
(alphanumeric characters)].
M741
M740
R11 R10
R11
M641
M741
R11
M641 M741
Setting Page
4
79
Sets initial settings, such as video quality compensation, at camera start up.
Initial Setting
If the current camera settings and saved initial camera settings differ when you access [Initial Setting], [Apply] in the upper
right of the screen will appear blue. If you click [Apply], the current camera settings will be saved as the initial camera
settings. Clicking [Clear] will revert to the initial camera settings saved in the camera.
In addition, if you click [Preset/Initial Setting] > [Initial Setting Registration] (P. 159) in Control for Admin, the settings at that
point will applied here as initial camera settings.
(1) Video Display Area
This displays a preview of how video will appear due to changes made in each item.
The video display area is used for confirmation. To actually apply the changes as initial camera settings, it is necessary
to click [Apply] and save the settings.
Set Initial Video Settings
[Camera] > [Initial Setting]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
M741
80
Note
If another Viewer with administrator privileges, such as the Admin Viewer, connects to the camera, video from the camera will cease and a
globe icon will appear in the video display area.
(2) Use the pan, tilt and zoom sliders.
Drag the sliders to pan (horizontally), tilt (vertically) or zoom in (telephoto)/zoom out (wide-angle) the camera.
To register the adjusted pan, tilt, and zoom positions as the initial camera angle settings, set [Pan/Tilt/Zoom Position] to
[Register] and click [Apply].
(3) [Snapshot] Button
Open the snapshot panel and display a still image of the moment you clicked the button (P. 186).
(4) [Reconnect] Button
Reconnects to the camera.
[Pan/Tilt/Zoom Position]
Choose if you would like to register the present pan, tilt, and zoom positions. If you select [Unregister], the camera will
return to the pan, tilt, and zoom positions when the camera was turned off, when restarted.
[Focus]
Selects the focus.
For details, please refer to “Focus” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 161).
[Exposure]
Selects an exposure.
For details, please refer to “Exposure” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 162).
[Slow Shutter]
When [Auto] is selected for [Exposure], you can select the slowest shutter speed.
For details, please refer to “Exposure” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 162).
[Exposure Compensation]
Selects an exposure compensation value.
For details, please refer to “Exposure” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 162).
[Metering Mode]
Selects a metering mode.
For details, please refer to “Exposure” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 162).
[Shutter Speed]
When [Manual] or [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] is selected for [Exposure], you can select the shutter speed.
For details, please refer to “Exposure” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 162).
[Aperture], [Gain]
These can be set when [Exposure] is [Manual].
For details, please refer to “Exposure” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 162).
[Smart Shade Control], [Smart Shade Control Level]
If the background is bright and the subject is hard to see, this function brightens dark areas without affecting bright areas to
make the subject easier to see.
For details, please refer to “Smart Shade Control” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 159).
Important
The setting is not available if [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto].
R11
R10
Setting Page
4
81
[White Balance]
Select the white balance according to the light source to achieve natural color in the video.
For details, please refer to “White Balance” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 164).
[Noise Reduction]
Select a noise reduction level.
For details, please refer to “Image Quality Adjustment” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 168).
[Sharpness]
Select a sharpness level.
For details, please refer to “Image Quality Adjustment” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 168).
[Color Saturation]
Select a color saturation level.
For details, please refer to “Image Quality Adjustment” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 168).
[Haze Compensation], [Haze Compensation Level]
If the subject is obscured by haze, this adjusts contrast in the video to improve subject visibility.
For details, please refer to “Haze Compensation” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 160).
[Day/Night]
Select a capture mode suited to the brightness of the subject.
For details, please refer to “Day/Night” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 165).
[Use Infrared], [Infrared Level]
Select whether or not to use the [Day/Night] linked infrared illumination.
For details, please refer to “Infrared” in “Use Control for Admin” (P. 167).
Important
• [Auto] cannot be selected for [Smart Shade Control] if [Exposure] is set to [Manual].
• [Smart Shade Control] is not available if [Haze Compensation] is set to [Auto] or [Manual].
Important
Haze Compensation cannot be used if [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto] or [Manual].
Important
[Infrared Level] can only be set when [Exposure] is [Manual].
M741
82
Reduces the size of transmitted H.264 video by reducing the video quality of non-target areas, such as ceilings and the sky.
ADSR is an abbreviation for Area-specific Data Size Reduction.
Note
• The quality of the specified area is determined by [Video Settings] > [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)].
• Even if the camera is panned, tilted, or zoomed, the specified area follows the movement of the camera.
• Specified areas can only be configured within view restrictions.
Specified Area
Specify the area where video quality is not lowered.
You can specify up to eight areas with different colored frames.
Note
If another Viewer with administrator privileges, such as the Admin Viewer, connects to the camera, a globe icon will appear in the video
display area and you will not be able to configure a specified area.
Reduce Data Size by Lowering Video Quality in Specific
Areas
[Video and Audio] > [ADSR]
Important
• This function can be used if [Bit Rate Control] is set to [Do not use bit rate control] in [Video Settings] > [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)].
• Some image scenes and settings for selected areas may not be able to reduce data size using ADSR. Please test the ADSR feature in
the environment, before use.
Important
• You may have to reconfigure the specified areas if you change the [Camera] > [Image Flip] setting.
• Reconfigure the specified area if you change the [Video Settings] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] settings.
• Configure the specified area to a slightly larger size.
• Specified areas may deviate slightly from the specified position depending on the zoom position.
• The selected area can only be set within the optical zoom range, and cannot be set using the digital zoom range (P. 148).
R11 R10
R11 R10
Setting Page
4
83
If you select [Enable] for the area with the frame color you would like to use for the specified area, the frame will appear on
the Viewer.
Set the specified area as follows with the display area.
• Drag out a frame and move it to the area you want to specify.
• Change the size of the frame by dragging any of the 8 handles (■).
• If you want to change the camera angle, use the pan/tilt/zoom sliders.
[Preview]
The camera will move to a specified area if you click [Preview] for that area.
Note
You can use Admin Viewer to check video with ADSR settings applied. Video outside the specified area will deteriorate according to the
amount of applied data reduction.
[Reconnect] Button
R11
R10
R11
R10
84
ADSR
Set whether H.264(1) and H.264(2) will each lower video quality outside areas set with [Specified Area].
[Enable in H.264(1)]
Select [Enable] to lower video quality outside areas set with [Specified Area] in H.264(1) video.
[Enable in H.264(2)]
Select [Enable] to lower video quality outside areas set with [Specified Area] in H.264(2) video.
Important
If you use [ADSR] with [H.264(1)], H.264(1) video cannot be uploaded or recorded to a memory card.
Setting Page
4
85
Displays the date and time, camera name and other UI strings on the Viewer.
Note
• Depending on video quality settings, on-screen display may become difficult to decipher. Set after confirming appearance on actual
video.
• When using digital PTZ, on-screen display will not appear if the cropped video has a horizontal size of 384 pixels or less.
On-Screen Display
[Date display]
Select whether to display the date on the Viewer.
[Position of date display]
Select position for date display on the Viewer.
[Format of date display]
Select the year, month and day display order.
[Time display]
Select whether to display the time on the Viewer.
[Position of time display]
Select position for time display on the Viewer.
[Text display]
Select the text strings to display on the Viewer.
[Display designated string]
Displays the text string entered in [Text string display] below.
[Display camera name]
Displays the camera name entered in [Camera Name (alphanumeric characters)] (P. 75).
[Position of text display]
Select position for text display on the Viewer.
Display Date, Time and Text on the Viewer
[Video and Audio] > [On-screen display]
Important
The on-screen time display is not suitable for usage where high reliability is required. Only use it as reference information on systems
where utmost and constant reliability is required for surveillance.
M641
M640
M741
M740
86
[Text string display]
If [Text display] is set to [Display designated string], enter the text string to be displayed in alphanumeric characters.
[Color of text]
Select from eight colors for the text color.
[Background color]
Select from eight colors for the background color.
[Color depth of text and background]
Select a color depth combination (Filling, Transparence, Translucence) for the text and background color.
Setting Page
4
87
Settings for audio input from the microphone connected to the camera and audio output from the Viewer. The output sound
clip used when an event is triggered can also be registered.
This [Audio Settings] submenu is common with the [Audio Settings] submenu found in the [Event] menu.
Settings configured in any page will be reflected in the other pages.
General Sound
Set the audio input/output volume, echo cancellation and microphone type.
[Input Volume]
Enter the input volume from the microphone connected to the camera.
This can be set when [Server] > [Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from the Camera] (P. 92) is set to [Enable].
[Output Volume]
Enter the output volume from the Viewer to the speaker connected to the camera.
This can be set when [Server] > [Audio Server] > [Audio Reception from Viewer] (P. 92) is set to [Enable].
[Echo Canceller]
Select to enable or disable the Echo Canceller for suppressing echoes that occur between the microphone and speaker.
This can be set when [Server] > [Audio Server] (P. 92) is set to the following.
• [Audio Transmission from the Camera] is set to [Enable]
• [Audio Reception from Viewer] is set to [Enable]
[Audio Input]
Select the type of microphone connected to the camera.
Set Audio Input/Output
[Video and Audio] > [Audio Settings]
Important
• Video and audio can be distributed to up to 30 clients. However, when there are many clients or they are connected to the camera over
an SSL connection, the video frame rate may slow down and the sound may drop out if audio reception from the camera is enabled.
• The video and audio may not be synchronized.
• If the [Input Volume] or [Echo Canceller] setting is changed after setting volume detection (P. 107) or scream detection (P. 108), check
the detection setting again.
• The audio may be temporarily interrupted, depending on the performance of the computer and the network environment.
• The audio may be interrupted if anti-virus software is enabled.
• Communication may be temporarily interrupted, cutting off the audio, if the LAN cable is unplugged and plugged in again. If this
occurs, reconnect from the Viewer.
• The volume, sound quality, etc., may change depending on the characteristics of the microphone used.
• Use a speaker with an amplifier to connect to the camera (“Installation Guide” > “Audio Input/Output Terminals”).
Important
Use of the Echo Canceller may affect audio quality and volume. Use it when necessary to suit the installation environment and camera
usage.
R11
M641
M741
88
Sound Clip Upload1to 3
You can upload up to three sound clips for playback when an event is triggered.
Note
The sound clip is used when audio playback is set in [Event] > [External Device Input] (P. 104) or [Intelligent Function Setting Tool] >
[Event] tab (P. 228).
[Browse File]
Specify the sound clip to upload and click [Add].
To be able to upload a sound clip, it must satisfy the following requirements.
• Playback length: Less than 20 seconds.
• File Format: “.wav” (µ-law PCM 8bit. Sampling frequency 8000 Hz, monaural)
A sample sound clip is included on the Setup CD-ROM in the SOUND folder.
[Sound Clip Name]
Enter the name of the sound clip to upload.
Be sure to enter the sound clip name. If it is blank when you click the [Apply] button, the sound clip will be deleted.
To delete an uploaded sound clip, click [Delete] next to the name of the sound clip.
Caution
If using a microphone, switch [Line In] and [Microphone In] (P. 87) with [Audio Input] to suit the specifications of the
microphone.
Using the wrong input may damage the camera and/or microphone. Be sure to configure settings correctly.
Setting Page
4
89
Settings for HTTP server, SNMP server, FTP server usage or WS-Security time checks.
HTTP Server
Set the authentication method and HTTP port number.
[Authentication Method]
Select an authentication method for use by the HTTP server.
[HTTP Port]
Enter an HTTP port number.
Normally use [80] (factory default setting).
[HTTPS Port]
Enter an HTTPS port number.
Normally use [443] (factory default setting).
SNMP Server
Configure the necessary settings to use SNMP.
Note
• The camera information referenced from the SNMP manager is read-only.
• Use an SNMP Manager that supports SNMP MIB2 (supporting RFC1213).
• Supports SNMP protocol versions v1 and v2c (v3 unsupported).
[SNMP]
Select this to enable or disable SNMP.
When using SNMP, the camera information can be referenced by the SNMP Manager.
[Community Name]
Enter a community name for SNMP.
HTTP, SNMP and FTP Server Settings
[Server] > [Server Settings]
Important
If the setting of [HTTP Port] or [HTTPS Port] is changed and the camera may become inaccessible from the active web browser, a
confirmation dialog box will appear. Click [OK] to apply the new setting.
If you reboot the camera and cannot connect to the camera from the web browser, any available URI for connecting to the camera will be
displayed in a message.
If you cannot connect to the camera through the displayed URI, contact your system administrator.
90
It is recommended that you change the default community name from [public] to ensure system security.
[Administrator Contact Information]
Enter contact information (e-mail address, etc.) for the administrator of the camera.
Setting information can be referenced by the SNMP manager.
[Administration Function Name]
Enter the camera name used for administration.
Setting information can be referenced by the SNMP manager.
If left blank, the camera model name will be used.
[Installation Location]
Enter information regarding the installation location of this camera.
Setting information can be referenced by the SNMP manager.
FTP Server
[Use FTP Server]
Select whether to use an FTP server.
Important
Canon will assume no liability for any accident or damage resulting from use of FTP software.
WS-Security
[Check Time on Authentication]
Select whether to check the time information of data transmitted by the client.
Setting Page
4
91
Settings for clients that can connect to a video server.
[Maximum Number of Clients]
Enter the maximum number of clients that can be connected to the camera at the same time.
If set to [0], only administrators will be able to connect.
[Camera Control Queue Length]
Enter the maximum queue length for clients requesting camera control privileges from the Viewer.
If set to [0], only Admin Viewer and Admin Tools can queue for camera control.
[Maximum Connection Time (sec.)]
Enter the maximum time in seconds during which an individual client can connect to the camera.
If set to [0], the connection time is unlimited.
[Camera Control Time (sec.)]
Enter the maximum time VB Viewer can retain camera control privileges.
Video Transmission Settings
[Server] > [Video Server]
Important
When there are many clients or they are connected to the camera over an SSL connection, the video frame rate may slow down and the
sound may drop out if audio reception from the camera is enabled.
R11
M641
M741
92
Settings for audio transmission from the camera to the computer, and audio reception from the computer to the camera.
[Audio Transmission from the Camera]
Select to transmit audio from the microphone connected to the camera to the Viewer.
[Voice Activity Detection]
Select whether to detect when there is no sound coming from the microphone.
When set to [Enable], audio data transmission will pause while there is no sound input from the camera. This can reduce the
load on the network used.
[Audio Reception from Viewer]
Select to receive audio from Admin Viewer and RM Viewer.
Received audio can be output from a speaker with an amplifier connected to the camera.
Audio Transmission/Reception Settings
[Server] > [Audio Server]
R11
M641
M741
Setting Page
4
93
Set the video and audio transmission using RTP.
RTP Server
Enable RTP, and set the RTSP authentication method and port number.
[RTP]
Select this to enable or disable RTP.
[RTSP Authentication Method]
Select an authentication method for RTSP. Since the RTSP authentication method is configured independently of the HTTP
authentication method, you need to configure each authentication method.
[RTSP Port]
Enter the RTSP port number.
Normally use [554] (factory default setting).
Audio Multicast
Set multicast for audio transmission.
[Multicast Address]
Enter the multicast address for audio transmission as follows.
IPv4: Range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
IPv6: Address starting with ff00::/8
Set IPv4 to [0.0.0.0] and IPv6 to [::0 (::)] to disable multicast.
[Multicast Port]
Enter the multicast port number for audio transmission.
If set to [0], multicast is disabled.
[Multicast TTL]
Enter the effective range for multicast transmission.
If set to [0], multicast is disabled.
The TTL (Time To Live), representing the effective range for multicast transmission, is decremented each time the signal
passes through a router. When the value reaches 0, the signal can no longer pass through the router and be transmitted.
For example, if TTL is set to [1], multicast transmission is confined to the local segment only and cannot pass through the
router to be transmitted.
RTP Settings
[Server] > [RTP Server]
R11
M641
M741
94
RTP Streaming 1 to 5
You can set each stream for RTP stream transmission in an RTP Streaming 1 to RTP Streaming 5 session.
[Video Size]
Select the video format (JPEG or H.264) and video size for the RTP stream.
The video sizes for JPEG will vary depending on the [Video Size Set] settings (P. 72).
The video sizes for H.264 will be determined according to the [H.264(1)] and [H.264(2)] settings in [Video Settings] (P. 73).
In addition, [H.264(1)] and [H.264(2)] cannot be set for multiple RTP streams.
[Frame Rate]
Enter the frame rate if the RTP stream is JPEG video.
This cannot be set for H.264 video. The [Frame Rate] setting in [Video Settings] > [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] will be used.
[Multicast Address]
Enter the multicast address for RTP streaming as follows.
IPv4: Range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
IPv6: Address starting with ff00::/8
Enter [0.0.0.0] for IPv4 and [::0(::)] for IPv6 to disable multicast.
[Multicast Port]
Enter the multicast port number for RTP streaming.
If set to [0], multicast is disabled.
[Multicast TTL]
Enter the effective range for multicast transmission of RTP streams.
If set to [0], multicast is disabled.
The TTL (Time To Live), representing the effective range for multicast transmission, is decremented each time the signal
passes through a router. When the value reaches 0, the signal can no longer pass through the router and be transmitted.
For example, if TTL is set to [1], multicast transmission is confined to the local segment only and cannot pass through the
router to be transmitted.
[Audio Transmission]
Select whether to use audio transmission for RTP streaming.
Note
• RTP Streaming URL
rtsp://Address:Port Number/rtpstream/config1(to 5)=r|u|m
[=r|u|m] is optional and can be omitted. If specified, specify only one option.
r: Requests RTP over TCP
u: Requests RTP over UDP
m: Requests multicast
Example: RTP Streaming 1 request using RTP over TCP
rtsp://192.168.100.1:554/rtpstream/config1=r
Caution: Note that the actual operation is dependent on the RTP client application, so the URL does not necessarily specify the method
used for transmission.
• When H.264 is selected, bit rate control and video quality are each set with [Video Settings] (P. 73).
• The [Video Distribution] and [Audio Distribution] settings in [Security] > [User Restrictions] > [User Authority] are not used for RTP.
• RTP streaming video may not be viewable on systems using a proxy server or firewall. If this occurs, contact your system administrator.
• If Host Access Restrictions are applied to a client while it is streaming using RTP over UDP, it may take from a few to tens of seconds
until streaming ceases.
R11
M641 M741
Setting Page
4
95
• Regardless of the [Server] > [Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from the Camera] setting, RTP streaming audio will be used.
However, to use audio settings, select [Enable] for [Audio Transmission from the Camera] and configure the settings.
R11
M641
M741
96
Settings for uploading video via HTTP or FTP when an event is triggered.
Use [Server] > [Server Settings] (P. 89) to configure HTTP server and FTP server settings for uploading.
Video Record Setting
When an event is triggered, sets whether to upload camera video with HTTP or FTP or to record the video to a memory card.
These can also be set with the [Memory Card] submenu (P. 101) and will be reflected in [Video Record Setting] here.
[Video Record Action]
Select [Upload] to upload video.
General Upload
Sets the upload method and video format for upload.
HTTP and FTP Upload Settings
[Video Record] > [Upload]
Important
• The following settings are necessary to use the upload function or recording to the memory card.
– [Video Record] settings configured with [Timer] in the [Event] menu.
– [Video Record] settings configured with each of the [Event] menus ([External Device], [Audio Detection] and [Linked Events]).
– The setting in the [Event] tab of the Intelligent Function Setting Tool (P. 227).
• When using the upload function, or recording to the memory card, do not change the settings in the [Setting Page]. Doing so may
result in the upload function or the recording to memory card to stop.
• If you are using HTTP or FTP upload, and e-mail notification by text and video, set [Video Settings] > [JPEG] > [Video Size: Upload /
Memory card] (P. 73) to a small size.
• HTTP upload does not support SSL/TLS.
• If the camera is set to upload or send e-mail notification continuously, not all video or e-mails may be sent depending on the video size
and the network condition to the server. If this occurs, a message is written to the log (P. 134).
• If the destination for HTTP or FTP upload, or e-mail notification is set for a Windows operating system, IPsec communication is not
supported.
R11
M641
M741
Setting Page
4
97
[Upload]
Select whether to upload with HTTP or FTP.
[Video Format]
Select the video format for upload. [H.264(2)] cannot be used.
Video size and quality of the uploaded video follow the settings in [Video Settings] (P. 72).
[Frame Rate]
Enter the maximum frame rate of video to be uploaded when [Video Format] is set to [JPEG].
[Pre-event Buffer (number of frames)] (JPEG)/ [Pre-event Buffer (sec)] (H.264(1))
Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be buffered before the event.
Enter the maximum number of frames for [JPEG] or the maximum number of seconds for [H.264(1)] in [Video Format].
[Post-event Buffer (number of frames)] (JPEG)/ [Post-event Buffer (sec)] (H.264(1))
Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be buffered after the event.
Enter the maximum number of frames for [JPEG] or the maximum number of seconds for [H.264(1)] in [Video Format].
Note
If the server or network load increases due to the upload settings, the video frame rate may drop. If this occurs, reconfigure the following
settings to reduce the size and frequency of uploaded data.
• Set a lower value for [Video Size: Upload / Memory card] for [JPEG] (P. 73).
• Reduce the number of frames or seconds in [Pre-event Buffer] or [Post-event Buffer] (P. 97).
• If [Volume Detection Event] is enabled, disable [ON Event Operation], [OFF Event Operation] or [Ongoing ON Event Operation] (P. 107).
• From the Intelligent Function Setting Tool [Event] tab, disable [ON Event Operation], [OFF Event Operation] or [Detected mode
Operation] (P. 227).
• If [External Device Input Event] is enabled, disable [Active Event Operation], [Inactive Event Operation] or [Ongoing Active Event
Operation] (P. 105).
• If [Timer Event] is enabled, increase the value in [Repeat Interval] (P. 110).
HTTP Upload
Settings for the HTTP upload function when [Upload] is set to [HTTP Upload].
The HTTP upload function sends notifications via HTTP or via HTTP with attached videos, depending on the network
camera event.
For information about the HTTP upload function and settings, contact your nearest Canon Customer Service Center.
Important
For H.264(1), the following settings must be configured in [Video Settings] > [H.264(1)] (P. 73).
– [Bit Rate Control]: [Use bit rate control]
– [Target Bit Rate (kbps)]: [3072] or less
– [I Frame Interval (sec)]: [0.5], [1] or [1.5]
Important
The maximum video buffer size capacity is approx. 5 MB. If a large video size is set, the Frame Rate, Pre-event Buffer and Post-event
Buffer may not be achieved as specified.
If buffering cannot be achieved as specified, a message is written to the log (P. 134). Confirm that no messages appear in the log.
R11
M641
M741
R11
M641 M741
98
[Notification]
Select whether to only send event information notifications or notifications with attached videos when using HTTP upload.
[URI]
Enter the HTTP server URI to which to upload.
[User Name], [Password]
Enter the user name and password required for authentication.
Digest authentication is not supported.
[Proxy Server]
If using a proxy server, enter the host name or IP address of the proxy server.
[Proxy Port]
If using a proxy server, enter the port number of the proxy server.
[Proxy User Name], [Proxy Password]
Enter to use a user name and password for the proxy server.
Digest authentication is not supported.
[Parameter (query string)]
Enter the request parameters.
Parameters can be specified using the “%” character (P. 252).
[HTTP Upload Test]
Clicking [Exec] initiates an upload test based on the settings currently entered.
Only a single JPEG will be uploaded, but it is not necessary to click [Apply] at that time. After entering a password,
first click [Exec], then click [Apply].
Important
Enter [Proxy Server], [Proxy Port], [Proxy User Name] and [Proxy Password] if connecting via a proxy server.
Setting Page
4
99
FTP Upload
Settings for the FTP upload function when [Upload] is set to [FTP Upload].
[Notification]
This is set to [Video data upload with FTP].
[FTP Server]
Enter the host name or IP address of FTP server.
[User Name], [Password]
Enter the user name and password required for authentication.
[PASV Mode]
Select whether to use PASV mode when connecting to an FTP server.
[File Upload Path]
Enter a remote path (directory name) for video files to be uploaded to.
[File Naming]
Select a first naming rule for the upload file.
[YYYYMMDDHHMMSSms]
Video is uploaded according to the file name format of “{year}{month}{day}{hour}{minute}{second}{ms}.jpg”.
(Example: 20140123112122000.jpg)
[YYYYMMDD Directory/HHMMSSms]
A subdirectory named “{year}{month}{day}” is created first, and then the video is uploaded using the file name
“{hour}{minute}{second}{ms}.jpg”.
(Example: 20140123/112122000.jpg)
[Loop]
Video is loaded with a file name numbered in sequence from 0000 up to the value set in [Maximum Number of Loops].
(Example: 0000.jpg, 0001.jpg) The number will return to 0000 when the maximum number of loops is reached.
Since the way FTP servers manage the upload of files with existing file names differs as follows, be sure to check the FTP
server specifications before configuring this setting.
• Overwrite the existing file name
• Automatically save the file with a different name
• Generate an error
[Maximum Number of Loops]
If [Loop] is set under [File Naming], enter the maximum number of loops.
100
[User Setting]
Video is uploaded according to the file naming method specified in [Subdirectory Name to Create] and [File Name to
Create].
[Subdirectory Name to Create], [File Name to Create]
If file naming is set to [User Setting], enter the subdirectory name to be created as well as the name of the created file.
Parameters can be specified in the entry with the “%” character (P. 252).
[FTP Upload Test]
Clicking [Exec] initiates an upload test based on the settings currently entered.
Only a single JPEG will be uploaded, but it is not necessary to click [Apply] at that time. After entering a password,
first click [Exec], then click [Apply].
Setting Page
4
101
Settings for recording video to a memory card when an event is triggered.
[Memory Card Operations] and [Memory Card Information] on this page are common with [Memory Card] (P. 130). Settings
configured in any page will be reflected in the other pages.
Video Record Setting
Sets whether to record video from the camera to a memory card or upload it with HTTP or FTP.
These can also be set with the [Upload] submenu (P. 96) and will be reflected in [Video Record Setting] here.
[Video Record Action]
Select [Record to Memory Card] to record to a memory card.
Memory Card Operations
For details on settings, please refer to (P. 130).
Memory Card Information
For details on settings, please refer to (P. 132).
Settings for Recording Video to a Memory Card
[Video Record] > [Memory Card]
102
Settings for sending an e-mail notification to a specified recipient when an event is triggered.
E-mail Notification
Set the mail server to be used for e-mail notifications and the content of the e-mail to be sent.
[Notification]
[Subject] and [Body] are text.
If you set [Text with Image], an image (JPEG format) captured immediately before the event will be attached.
[Mail Server Name]
Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
[Mail Server Port]
Enter the port number for the SMTP server.
[Sender (From)]
Enter the e-mail address of the sender.
[Recipient (To)]
Enter the e-mail address of the recipient.
[Authentication]
Select an authentication method suited to the destination SMTP server.
[User Name], [Password], [POP Server]
Enter the user name and password needed for authentication, and the POP server host name or IP address when e-mail
authentication is set to [POP before SMTP].
Set E-mail Notification
[Video Record] > [E-mail Notification]
Setting Page
4
103
[User Name], [Password]
Enter the user name and password needed for authentication when e-mail authentication is set to [SMTP-AUTH].
[Subject]
Enter the subject of the e-mail in alphanumeric characters.
[Message Body]
Enter the message body (text) of the e-mail in alphanumeric characters.
Parameters can be specified in the text using the “%” character (P. 252).
[E-mail Notification Test]
Clicking [Exec] initiates an e-mail notification test based on the settings currently entered.
It is not necessary to click [Apply]. After entering a password, first click [Exec], then click [Apply].
104
Operation settings for external device output and for external device input triggered events.
External Device Output 1, 2
Set the operation for output to the external device.
The camera has two external device outputs. You can set the output for each of them.
Note
The output for an external device can be switched between active and inactive with [Control for Admin] > [External Device Output]
(P. 167).
[Operation Mode]
Select whether the output terminals are normally open or closed.
When [Normally Open] is set, the output terminals remain in the open state (non-conducting circuit) during normal
operation, and the terminals close upon an active event and open upon an inactive event.
When [Normally Close] is selected, the output terminals remain in the closed state (conducting circuit) during normal
operation, and the terminals open upon an active event and close upon an inactive event.
[Active Output Format]
Select the output format when the external device output is active.
[Pulse Output Time (sec)]
Enter the output duration time (sec.) when [Active Output Format] is set to [Pulse].
External Device Input
[External Device Input Event]
Select whether to use the input from an external device, such as a connected sensor, as an event.
External Device Input Triggered Operation Settings
[Event] > [External Device]
Important
When [Active Output Format] is set to [Pulse] and a timer is used (P. 110), a single contact output is controlled when the timer starts.
R11
M641
M741
Normally Open
Active Event Status
Inactive Event Status
1 (The contact is closed.)
0 (The contact is open.)
Normally Close
Inactive Event Status
Active Event Status
1 (The contact is closed.)
0 (The contact is open.)
Setting Page
4
105
External Device Input 1, 2
Set the operation to be performed when an event is triggered by input from an external device.
The camera has two external device inputs. You can set the input for each of them.
You can set these if you have selected [Enable] in [External Device Input Event].
Note
An icon in the Admin Viewer Event Display panel will indicate when there is an external device input event (P. 184).
[Operation Mode]
Select the circuit condition to suit the signal input from the connected external device.
When [Normally Open] is set, an active event occurs when the terminals of the external device close, and an inactive event
occurs when the terminals open.
When [Normally Close] is set, an active event occurs when the terminals of the external device open, and an inactive event
occurs when the terminals close.
[Active Event Operation]
Select the operation to be performed when an active event is triggered.
If [Enable] is set, [Preset], [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings when an
active event is triggered.
[Inactive Event Operation]
Select the operation to be performed when an inactive event is triggered.
If [Enable] is set, [Preset], [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings when an
inactive event is completed.
[Ongoing Active Event Operation]
Select the operation to be performed during an active event. This can only be set when [Active Event Operation] is set to
[Enable].
If [Enable] is selected, [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings during the active
event.
[Preset]
If you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to the preset location when an external device input event
is triggered.
It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Control for Admin] > [Preset/Initial Setting] > [Preset Setting] (P. 170).
Important
When the user has camera control privileges, those camera control privileges are released if the camera is moved to a preset position
specified in the [Preset] settings.
R11
106
[Video Record]
Select whether to record video depending on the event.
If you select [Enable] and an external device input event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination
specified in [Video Record Action] (P. 96).
[E-mail Notification]
Select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the event.
If [Enable] is selected, e-mail notification will be performed when an external device input event is triggered.
To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 102) beforehand.
[External Device Output for Active Event]
Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an active event is triggered.
[External Device Output for Inactive Event]
Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an inactive event is triggered.
[Audio Playback at Active Event]
If you select [Enable], the sound clip specified in [Sound Clip] will play back at active events for the external device input.
[Audio Playback at Inactive Event]
If you select [Enable], the sound clip specified in [Sound Clip] will play back at inactive events for the external device input.
[Sound Clip]
Select the sound clip when [Audio Playback at Active Event] or [Audio Playback at Inactive Event] has been set to
[Enable].
You must register the sound clip with [Video and Audio] > [Audio Settings] (P. 88) beforehand.
[Volume]
Enter the volume for the sound clip.
[Switch Day/Night]
Select the Day/Night Mode switching behavior when an external device input event is triggered.
When [Switch to Day Mode] is set, switches to Day Mode when an active event is triggered, and switches to Night Mode
when an inactive event is triggered.
When [Switch to Night Mode] is set, switches to Night Mode when an active event is triggered, and switches to Day Mode
when an inactive event is triggered.
Important
• When [Day/Night] in the Admin Viewer is set to [Auto] (P. 165), [Switch Day/Night] will not happen when an external device input event
is triggered.
• If the [Switch Day/Night] settings switch Day/Night Mode while the user has camera control privileges, camera control will be released.
Setting Page
4
107
Audio input from the microphone connected to the camera, such as loud noises or screams, or when expected audio input
ceases, can trigger operations such as video recording or e-mail notification.
Note
You can check the audio detection status on the Admin Viewer Event Display panel (P. 185).
Volume Detection
An audio detection event will be triggered when audio input volume is detected exceeding or falling below the reference
volume setting.
Set the conditions for triggering a volume detection event and the operations to perform according to an event.
[Volume Detection Event]
Select whether to use volume detection event.
[Detect Criteria]
Select the criteria for triggering a volume detection event.
[Reference Volume Level]
Enter the reference sound level to be used for detection.
Set the reference volume level by performing an actual test while checking [Current Volume Level] before configuring the
setting.
[Current Volume Level]
The current volume level appears on the status bar.
The level set in [Reference Volume Level] is indicated by a red mark. Volume below the reference level appears in blue, that
above the reference level appears in red.
Abnormal Audio Input Triggered Operation Settings
[Event] > [Audio Detection]
Important
For notes on use of volume detection, please refer to “Precautions for Built-In Camera Functions and Included Software” (P. 9) in “Safety
Precautions”.
Important
Volume detection is temporarily disabled when an event causes the playback of a sound clip or when audio is transmitted from the
Viewer.
R11
M641
M741
108
[Detect Criteria Duration (sec)]
When the status meeting the volume detection criteria has continued for the duration or longer, an ON event is triggered.
[ON Event Operation]
If [Enable] is set, [Preset], [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings when a
volume detection event (ON event) is triggered.
[OFF Event Operation]
If [Enable] is set, [Preset], [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings when a
volume detection event (OFF event) is completed.
[Ongoing ON Event Operation]
Select the operation to be performed when an ON event is triggered. This can be set when [ON Event Operation] is set to
[Enable].
If [Enable] is selected, [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings during the
volume detection event.
[Preset]
If you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to the preset location when a volume detection event is
triggered.
It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Control for Admin] > [Preset/Initial Setting] > [Preset Setting] (P. 170).
[Video Record]
Select whether to record video depending on the volume detection event.
If you select [Enable] and a volume detection event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination
specified in [Video Record Action] (P. 96).
[E-mail Notification]
Select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the volume detection event.
If you select [Enable] and a volume detection event is triggered, an e-mail notification will be sent.
To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 102) beforehand.
[External Device Output for ON Event]
Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an ON event is triggered.
[External Device Output for OFF Event]
Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an OFF event is triggered.
Scream Detection
A scream detection event is triggered when sounds from someone, such as a scream or cry, are detected.
You can also set the operations to perform depending on the scream detection event.
Important
When the user has camera control privileges, those camera control privileges are released if the camera is moved to a preset position
specified in the [Preset] when triggered by a volume detection event.
Important
• Scream detection detects abnormal sound in relatively quiet environments. Detection is difficult in noisy environments.
• The scream detection is not a voice recognition function.
• Detection may be difficult if an excessively loud scream is input.
• Detection may be difficult if the duration of the scream is short.
• Detection may be temporarily difficult if the same sound is input repeatedly multiple times.
R11
R11
Setting Page
4
109
[Scream Detection Event]
Select whether to use scream detection event.
[ON Event Operation]
If [Enable] is set, [Preset], [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings when a
scream detection event (ON event) is triggered.
[Preset]
If you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to the preset location when a scream detection event is
triggered.
It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Control for Admin] > [Preset/Initial Setting] > [Preset Setting] (P. 170).
[Video Record]
Select whether to record video depending on the scream detection event.
If you select [Enable] and a scream detection event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination
specified in [Video Record Action] (P. 96).
[E-mail Notification]
Select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the scream detection event.
If you select [Enable] and a scream detection event is triggered, an e-mail notification will be sent.
To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 102) beforehand.
[External Device Output for ON Event]
Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an ON event is triggered.
Important
When the user has camera control privileges, those camera control privileges are released if the camera is moved to a preset position
specified in the [Preset] when triggered by a scream detection event.
R11
110
The timer function can generate events that can trigger operations, such as video recording and e-mail notifications, at
regular intervals.
You can set the following two types of timers.
• 24 hours continuous from specified timer
• Within specified time only
Either type can be set to trigger timer events at regular intervals.
Note
Timer events are different than [Timer] in [Control for Admin] > [Preset/Initial Setting] > [Preset Setting] > [Auto Control Settings] tab
(P. 177).
Timer 1 to 4
You can register up to 4 timer events.
[Timer Event]
Select whether to use a timer event.
[24-Hour Continuous Setting]
When set to [Enable], the timer event will be repeated at the interval in [Repeat Interval] for 24 hours, starting from the time
specified in [Start Time].
When set to [Enable], only [Video Record] operations will be performed.
[Start Time]
Enter the start time of the timer event in 24-hour format. The timer event will be triggered at the start time.
[End Time]
When [24-Hour Continuous Setting] is set to [Disable], enter the end time in 24-hour format for repeating the timer event.
The timer event will be triggered at the end time.
[Repeat Interval]
Select a repeat interval for timer events. The timer event will be triggered at the selected intervals.
Operation
Set the operations to be performed when timer events are triggered.
[Start Time Preset]
When [24-Hour Continuous Setting] is set to [Disable] and you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to
the preset location at the time set in [Start Time].
Timer Triggered Operation Settings
[Event] > [Timer]
R11
R10
Setting Page
4
111
It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Control for Admin] > [Preset/Initial Setting] > [Preset Setting] (P. 170).
[Video Record]
Select whether to record video depending on the timer event.
If you select [Enable] and a timer event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination specified in
[Video Record Action] (P. 96).
[E-mail Notification]
When [24-Hour Continuous Setting] is set to [Disable], select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the timer
event.
If [Enable] is selected, e-mail notification is performed when a timer event is triggered.
To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 102) beforehand.
[External Device Output]
When [24-Hour Continuous Setting] is set to [Disable], set whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when
a timer event is triggered.
[Repeat Interval] is not supported.
[Switch Day/Night]
When [24-Hour Continuous Setting] is set to [Disable], select the Day/Night Mode switching behavior when a timer event is
triggered. This can only be set with [Timer 1].
Select [Switch to Day Mode] to switch to Day Mode at the start time, and Night Mode at the end time.
Select [Switch to Night Mode] to switch to Night Mode at the start time, and Day Mode at the end time.
[Repeat Interval] is not supported.
Important
When control privileges are held by applications like Admin Viewer, and the camera angle has moved as a result of [Start Time Present],
camera control is released.
Important
• If you set [Start Time] and [End Time] and select a preset with [Start Time Preset], the Day/Night setting in [Control for Admin] >
[Preset/Initial Setting] > [Preset Setting] > [Preset Registration] tab > [Advanced Preset Settings] > [Day/Night] (P. 174) is given
priority. Therefore, even if you set [Switch Day/Night] to [Switch to Day Mode] or [Switch to Night Mode], the [Switch Day/Night] setting
will be disabled if the opposite setting has been configured in [Control for Admin] > [Advanced Preset Settings].
• When [Day/Night] in the Control for Admin is set to [Auto] (P. 165), [Switch Day/Night] will not happen when a timer event is triggered.
• If the [Day/Night Mode Switching] settings switch Day/Night Mode while the user has camera control privileges, camera control will be
released.
R11
M641
M741
112
When events trigger the switching of Day/Night Mode, presets registered in advance can be executed, such as changing
the camera angle or video quality settings.
Note
• It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Control for Admin] > [Preset/Initial Setting] (P. 170).
• You can set the timing for event triggered Day/Night Mode switching in [Switch Day/Night] in [External Device Input] (P. 105) or [Timer]
(P. 110).
[Preset when Switching to Day Mode]
Executes the preset when switched to Day Mode.
[Preset when Switching to Night Mode]
Executes the preset when switched to Night Mode.
Execute Presets When Switching Day/Night Mode
[Event] > [Switch Day/Night]
Important
When the Admin Viewer or other camera control applications have control privileges, the presets for [Preset when Switching to Day
mode] and [Preset when Switching to Night Mode] will not run.
Setting Page
4
113
By linking two types of events, a single event is triggered. Select AND/OR for the event linking method.
You can set the operations to perform, such as recording video or sending e-mail notifications, when a linked event is
triggered.
Note
You can check the linked event status on the Admin Viewer Event Display panel (P. 185).
Linked Event 1 to 4
You can register up to four linked events.
You can link five types of events: [Volume Detection], [Scream Detection], [External Device Input], [Timer] and [Intelligent
Function].
[Linked Events]
Select whether to use a linked event.
[Event Linking Method]
Select the event linking conditions.
[AND]: A new linked event is triggered if both event types selected with [Event 1] and [Event 2] are triggered. Set [Event
Order] and [Event Gap] for this.
[OR]: A new linked event is triggered if either event type selected with [Event 1] and [Event 2] is triggered.
Use Event Combinations
[Event] > [Linked Event]
R11
M641
M741
114
[Event Order]
You can select the order two events must be triggered when [Event Linking Method] is set to [AND].
If set to [None], the order will not be considered.
[Event Gap (seconds)]
Enter the interval between two events that must be triggered when [Event Linking Method] is set to [AND].
A new linked event is triggered if the second event triggers within the specified interval after the first event was triggered.
Event 1, 2
Specify the two events to be linked. The settings are the same for both.
[Event Type]
Select the event type for linking.
Note
[Intelligent Function] cannot be specified in both [Event 1] and [Event 2].
For [Volume Detection], select whether an ON event or OFF event triggers a linked event.
For [Scream Detection], select whether an ON event or OFF event triggers a linked event.
For [External Device Input], select External Device Input 1 or 2, then select an active event or inactive event to trigger
a linked event.
For [Timer], select the timer event number to use.
For [Intelligent Function], select the Intelligent Function detection setting number (P. 217) to use.
Operation
Set the operations to be performed when linked events are triggered.
[ON Event Operation]
If [Enable] is set, [Preset], [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings when
a linked event (ON event) is triggered.
Setting Page
4
115
[OFF Event Operation]
If [Enable] is set, [Preset], [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings when
a linked event (OFF event) is completed.
[Ongoing ON Event Operation]
Select the operation to be performed when an ON event is triggered.
If [Enable] is selected, [Video Record] and [E-mail Notification] will be executed according to their settings during the
linked event.
[Preset]
If you specify a preset, the camera angle will automatically move to the preset location when a linked event is
triggered.
It is necessary to set presets beforehand with [Control for Admin] > [Preset/Initial Setting] > [Preset Setting] (P. 170).
Note
This cannot be set when [Event Type] is set to [Intelligent Function].
[Video Record]
Select whether to record video depending on the linked event.
If you select [Enable] and a linked event is triggered, video will be transmitted to the recording destination specified
in [Video Record Action] (P. 96).
[E-mail Notification]
Select whether to send an e-mail notification depending on the linked event.
If you select [Enable] and a linked event is triggered, an e-mail notification will be sent.
To use e-mail notification, you must set [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification] (P. 102) beforehand.
[External Device Output for ON Event]
Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an ON event is triggered.
[External Device Output for OFF Event]
Select whether external device output (1 or 2) is active or inactive when an OFF event is triggered.
[Audio Playback at ON Event]
If you select [Enable], the sound clip specified in [Sound Clip] will play back when a linked event is triggered.
Note
This can only be set when [Event Type] is set to [External Device Input] or [Intelligent Function].
[Audio Playback at OFF Event]
If you select [Enable], the sound clip specified in [Sound Clip] will play back when a linked event completes.
[Sound Clip]
Select the sound clip when [Audio Playback at ON Event] or [Audio Playback at OFF Event] has been set to [Enable].
You must register the sound clip with [Video and Audio] > [Audio Settings] (P. 88) beforehand.
[Volume]
Enter the volume for the sound clip.
Linked Event Operation Examples
This shows linked event status examples according to the ON/OFF combinations for Event 1 and Event 2.
In the examples below, [Event Gap] is 4 seconds and each cell in the graph below represents 1 second.
[Event Linking Method] Set to [OR]
Only One Event ON
R11
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
state
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
116
Both Events ON
[Event Linking Method] is Set to [AND], [Event Order] is Specified
This shows examples when [Event Order] is set to [Event 1 -> 2].
When [Event Order] is set to [None], and [Event Linking Method] is set to [AND] linked events will be as in the
examples even if Event 1 and Event 2 are switched.
When Events Occur in Order 1 -> 2
When Events Occur in Order 2-> 1 -> 2
Event 2 Triggered but Event Gap Setting ([4] sec.) Exceeded
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
state
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
state
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
state
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Both events are ON, but their order of occurrence is
incorrect. Therefore, a linked event does not occur here.
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
state
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
The gap between the occurrence of event 2 after the
occurrence of event 1 exceeds the value specified for the
[Event Gap] setting. Therefore, a linked event does not occur.
Event gap (4 sec. in this example)
Setting Page
4
117
[Status] of Event 1 Set to [OFF], ON States Do Not Coincide
One Event Switches Between ON/OFF
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
state
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
The linked event does not occur when event 1
turns OFF, but at the moment event 2 turns ON.
Event gap (4 sec. in this example)
ON
Event 1
Event 2
Consolidated
state
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Event gap (4 sec. in this example)
118
Used for adding new authorized users that can access Admin Viewer, and for setting permissions for authorized and guest
users.
For details on user permissions, please refer to “Viewer Access Restrictions” (P. 138).
Authorized User Account
Add authorized users.
[User Name], [Password]
To add the authorized user, enter the user name and password, then click [Add].
The user name can use the characters A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, “-” (hyphen) and “_” (underscore).
Enter the password in alphanumeric characters.
Up to 50 authorized users can be added.
[User List]
Displays a list of added authorized users.
The order of the list can be changed with the ▲▼ buttons on the right.
To delete an authorized user from the list, select the user and click [Delete].
User Authority
Set the permissions for authorized users and guest users.
[Privileged Camera Control], [Camera Control], [Video Distribution]
[Audio Distribution]
Select the items for granting users permissions.
Authorized users have elevated permissions compared to guest users.
Set Users Who Connect to the Camera
[Security] > [User Restrictions]
R11
M641
M741
Setting Page
4
119
Separate access control from IPv4 and IPv6 addresses can be set.
Note
If the same address is duplicated, the policy for the address that appears highest on the list will be applied.
IPv4 Host Access Restrictions
Specify the hosts from which IPv4 access is permitted and restricted.
[Apply Host Access Restrictions]
Select whether to use IPv4 host access restrictions.
[Default Policy]
Select whether to allow or block access from IPv4 addresses that have not been specified in [Network Address / Subnet].
[Network Address / Subnet]
Enter IPv4 addresses into the list and select [Yes] or [No] for access for each address.
You can specify the subnet to set access restrictions by network or host.
If set to [No], access to all ports is blocked.
Set Access Restrictions
[Security] > [Host Access Restrictions]
Important
• To prohibit access via a proxy server in HTTP connection, a proxy server address must be set.
• If host access restriction is set mistakenly, access to the Setting Pages themselves may be prohibited, in which case restoring the
factory default settings will become the only means for recovery.
120
IPv6 Host Access Restrictions
Specify the hosts from which IPv6 access is permitted and restricted.
[Apply Host Access Restrictions]
Select whether to use IPv6 host access restrictions.
[Default Policy]
Select whether to allow or block access from IPv6 addresses that have not been specified in [Prefix / Prefix Length].
[Prefix / Prefix Length]
Enter IPv6 addresses (prefixes) into the list and select [Yes] or [No] for access for each address.
You can specify the prefix length to set access restriction by network or host.
If set to [No], access to all ports is blocked.
Setting Page
4
121
Certificate creation, administrative settings and encrypted communication settings.
Certificates
Create an SSL/TLS certificate.
[Create Self-Signed Certificate]
Enter the following items and click [Exec] to create a self-signed certificate.
Follow the displayed message and reboot. The certificate created will take effect after rebooting.
Note
Creating a certificate takes time, so it is recommended that you stop video transmission and upload processes.
[Certificate Status]
If no certificate is installed, [Not Installed] will appear. If a certificate is installed, the validity period for the certificate will
appear.
[Country (C)]
Enter the ISO3166-1 alpha-2 country code.
[State/Province (ST)], [Locality (L)], [Organization (O)], [Organizational Unit (OU)], [Common Name (CN)]
Enter state/province name, locality, organization name, organizational unit and common name in alphanumeric characters
(spaces or printable characters).
Enter an FQDN format host name, etc. to set the common name (required).
[Validity Period Start Date], [Validity Period End Date]
Set the validity period of the certificate to be created (required when creating a self-signed certificate).
Set HTTP Communication Encryption
[Security] > [SSL/TLS]
Important
Use a self-signed certificate when complete security does not need to be ensured, such as through operation tests. For system
operation, it is recommended that you acquire and install a certificate issued by a CA.
122
Certificate Management
Manage the SSL/TLS certificate.
[Generate Certificate Signing Request]
Click [Exec] to create server private key and generate a certificate signing request.
Once processed, the certificate signing request will appear in a separate window.
Note
Generating a certificate signing request takes time, so it is recommended that you stop video transmission and upload processes.
[Display Certificate Signing Request]
Click [Exec] to view the details of the certificate signing request.
[Install Server Certificate]
Perform this operation to install a server certificate.
Specify the certificate file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].
The certificate installed will take effect after rebooting.
[Install Intermediate Certificate]
Perform this operation to install an intermediate certificate.
Specify the certificate file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].
The certificate installed will take effect after rebooting.
Note
To install an intermediate certificate and a primary intermediate certificate, use a text editor or similar software to place them in the same
file and install them as an intermediate certificate.
[Delete Server Certificate]
Click [Exec] to delete the server certificate.
However, if SSL communications are enabled, the certificate cannot be deleted. Set [SSL Communications] to [Disable]
before deleting a certificate.
The deletion will take effect after rebooting.
[Delete Intermediate Certificate]
Click [Exec] to delete the intermediate certificate along with the primary certificate.
However, if SSL communications are enabled, the certificate cannot be deleted. Set [SSL Communications] to [Disable]
before deleting a certificate.
The deletion will take effect after rebooting.
[Display Server Certificate Details]
Click [Exec] to view the details of the certificate.
[Display Self CA Certificate]
Used for the purpose of testing SSL communications, but otherwise not normally used.
[Backup]
Click [Exec] to perform a backup of the certificates and private key. This can only be performed via SSL communications.
Setting Page
4
123
[Restore]
Installs the certificates and private key from backup.
Click [Browse] to specify the backup file, then click [Exec]. This can only be performed via SSL communications.
The restored certificate will take effect after rebooting.
Encrypted Communications
Set encrypted communications.
[SSL Communications]
Select this to enable or disable SSL communications.
The setting will take effect after rebooting.
However, if no certificate is installed, SSL communications cannot be used.
Note
• It may take a few minutes to generate an SSL key.
• If SSL communications are used, video transmission performance drops.
• Depending on the type of the certificate being installed on the camera, a dialog box may appear indicating that the web browser has
accepted the certificate and a connection can be made. If the dialog box does not appear, register the CA certificate in the web
browser.
124
Settings for 802.1X authentication and authentication status display, and for certificate administration.
802.1X Authentication
Display the 802.1X authentication enable/disable control and status.
[802.1X Authentication]
Select this to enable or disable 802.1X authentication.
[Authentication Status]
Display the status of 802.1X authentication. There are three types of status: [Authenticated], [Unauthenticated], and [Stop].
Authentication Method
Set the authentication method used for 802.1X authentication.
[Authentication Method]
Select the authentication method used for 802.1X authentication.
[User Name]
Enter the user name used for authentication.
[Password]
Enter the required password for authentication.
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-MD5], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP].
Certificate Information
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP].
[CA Certificate Status]
If no CA certificate is installed, [Not Installed] is displayed. If a CA certificate is installed, the validity period of the
certificate is displayed.
[Client Certificate Status]
If no client certificate is installed, [Not Installed] is displayed. If a client certificate is installed, the validity period of the
certificate is displayed.
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].
Network Port Authentication Settings
[Security] > [802.1X]
Setting Page
4
125
[Client Private Key Status]
If no client private key is installed, [Not Installed] is displayed. If a client private key is installed, [Installed] is
displayed.
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].
Certificate Management
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP].
[Install CA Certificate]
Installs a CA certificate.
Specify the certificate file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].
[Install Client Certificate]
Installs a client certificate.
Specify the certificate file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].
[Install Client Private Key]
Installs a client private key.
Specify the private key file to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].
[Client Private Key Password]
Enter the password for the client private key.
Required when a password has been configured for the private key.
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].
[Delete Certificate]
Deletes all installed CA certificates, client certificates, and client private keys.
Only “CA Certificate” is displayed when [Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TTLS] or [EAP-PEAP], but any
installed client certificates and client private keys are also deleted.
Important
• If any CA certificates, client certificates, and client private keys already exist when installing certificates, they are discarded and
new versions are installed.
• An error occurs if the format of the certificate or private key to be installed is incorrect.
• Client certificates and client private keys are checked as a pair when installing, and an error occurs if they do not match.
• The certificate and private key used for 802.1X authentication must be installed as separate items, irrespective of the installation
status of certificates for SSL/TLS.
126
Settings for using IPsec.
Note
If IPsec is used, video transmission performance drops.
IPsec
[IPsec]
Select key settings for using IPsec.
Auto Key Exchange Settings
[IPsec SA Encryption Algorithm]
Select the IPsec SA encryption algorithm.
The specified algorithm will be checked for an applicable encryption algorithm starting from the left.
[IPsec SA Authentication Algorithm]
Select the IPsec SA authentication algorithm.
The specified algorithm will be checked for an applicable authentication algorithm starting from the left.
[IPsec SA Validity Period (min)]
Enter the duration of validity for IPsec SA.
[ISAKMP SA Encryption Algorithm]
Select the SA encryption algorithm for use with auto key exchange protocol IKE.
Set IPsec
[Security] > [IPsec]
Important
• To run this camera with IPsec, the communicating devices and network must be set beforehand. Contact your system administrator for
these settings.
• When connecting with IPsec, set the camera IP address manually.
For IPv4 addresses, use addresses with [IPv4 Address Setting Method] set to [Manual] in [Basic Settings] > [Network] > [IPv4].
For IPv6 addresses, use addresses set with [IPv6 Address (Manual)] in [Basic Settings] > [Network] > [IPv6].
• If the IPsec setting is changed and the camera may become inaccessible from the active web browser, a confirmation dialog box will
appear. Click [OK] to apply the new settings.
If you reboot the camera and cannot connect to the camera from the web browser, any available URI for connecting to the camera will
be displayed in a message.
If you cannot connect to the camera through the displayed URI, contact your system administrator.
Setting Page
4
127
[ISAKMP SA Authentication Algorithm]
Select the SA authentication algorithm for use with auto key exchange protocol IKE.
[DH Group]
Select the key generation information that will be used in the DH algorithm for key exchange via auto key exchange protocol
IKE.
[ISAKMP SA Validity Period (min)]
Enter the duration of validity for ISAKMP SA.
IPsec Set 1 to 5
IP security can be specified through auto key exchange or manual setting with up to five communicating devices.
Auto Key Exchange
Note
If auto key exchange is used, it will take approximately 5 to 10 seconds before communication with the camera starts.
[IPsec Set]
Set whether IPv4 or IPv6 will use or will not use IPsec sets.
[IPsec Mode]
Select the IPsec mode.
[Destination IPv4 Address], [Destination IPv6 Address]
Enter the IP address of the connection destination.
[Source IPv4 Address], [Source IPv6 Address]
Enter the IP address of the source.
[Security Protocol]
Select the IPsec protocol.
If [ESP] is selected, enter only the setting items relating to ESP.
If [AH] is selected, enter only the setting items relating to AH.
If [ESP and AH] is selected, enter all setting items.
[Security Gateway IPv4 Address], [Security Gateway IPv6 Address]
Enter the IP address of the security gateway if [IPsec Mode] is set to [Tunnel Mode].
[Destination Subnet Mask Length] (IPv4), [Destination Prefix Length] (IPv6)
Enter the subnet mask (IPv4) or prefix length (IPv6) when [IPsec Mode] is set to [Tunnel Mode].
[IKE Pre-Shared Key]
Enter the pre-shared key for IKE (auto key exchange).
Important
If the camera is rebooted during auto key exchange communication, a connection error may result after rebooting. If this occurs,
connect again.
128
Manual
[IPsec Set]
Set whether IPv4 or IPv6 will use or will not use IPsec sets.
[IPsec Mode]
Select the IPsec mode.
[Destination IPv4 Address], [Destination IPv6 Address]
Enter the IP address of the connection destination.
[Source IPv4 Address], [Source IPv6 Address]
Enter the IP address of the source.
[Security Protocol]
Select the IPsec protocol.
If [ESP] is selected, enter only the setting items relating to ESP.
If [AH] is selected, enter only the setting items relating to AH.
If [ESP and AH] is selected, enter all setting items.
[Security Gateway IPv4 Address], [Security Gateway IPv6 Address]
Enter the IP address of the security gateway if [IPsec Mode] is set to [Tunnel Mode].
[Destination Subnet Mask Length] (IPv4), [Destination Prefix Length] (IPv6)
Enter the subnet mask (IPv4) or prefix length (IPv6) when [IPsec Mode] is set to [Tunnel Mode].
When [Security Protocol] Is Set to [ESP] or [ESP and AH]
[SA ESP Encryption Algorithm] to [SA ESP SPI (inbound)] must be set.
[SA ESP Encryption Algorithm]
Set the ESP encryption algorithm to suit the encryption algorithm supported by the device to connect to.
Normally [AES] or [3DES] is recommended.
[SA ESP Authentication Algorithm]
Set the ESP authentication algorithm to suit the authentication algorithm supported by the device to connect to.
Setting Page
4
129
If [ESP] is used alone, [No Authentication] cannot be selected.
[SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)]
Enter the SA encryption key for outbound.
If [AES], [3DES] or [DES] was selected in [SA ESP Encryption Algorithm], set a 128-bit, 192-bit or 64-bit hexadecimal
number, respectively. This item need not be set if [NULL] was selected.
[SA ESP Authentication Key (outbound)]
Enter the SA authentication key for outbound.
If [HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected in [SA ESP Authentication Algorithm], set a 160-bit or 128-bit
hexadecimal number, respectively. This item need not be set if [No Authentication] was selected.
[SA ESP SPI (outbound)]
Enter the SA SPI value for outbound.
Set a desired value in the range of 256 to 4294967295.
[SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)]
Enter the SA encryption key for inbound.
If [AES], [3DES] or [DES] was selected in [SA ESP Encryption Algorithm], set a 128-bit, 192-bit or 64-bit hexadecimal
number, respectively. This item need not be set if [NULL] was selected.
[SA ESP Authentication Key (inbound)]
Enter the SA authentication key for inbound.
If [HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected in [SA ESP Authentication Algorithm], set a 160-bit or 128-bit
hexadecimal number, respectively. This item need not be set if [No Authentication] was selected.
[SA ESP SPI (inbound)]
Enter the SA SPI value for inbound.
Set a desired value in the range of 256 to 4294967295.
Since this setting is used as an ID for identifying the SA, be careful not to specify an inbound SPI whose value is
already used in the SPI for other ESP.
When [Security Protocol] Is Set to [AH] or [ESP and AH]
[SA AH Authentication Algorithm] to [SA AH SPI (inbound)] must be set.
[SA AH Authentication Algorithm]
Set the AH authentication algorithm to suit the authentication algorithm supported by the device to connect to.
[SA AH Authentication Key (outbound)]
Enter the SA authentication key for outbound.
If [HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected in [SA AH Authentication Algorithm], set a 160-bit or 128-bit
hexadecimal number, respectively.
[SA AH SPI (outbound)]
Enter the SA SPI value for outbound.
Set a desired value in the range of 256 to 4294967295.
[SA AH Authentication Key (inbound)]
Enter the SA authentication key for inbound.
If [HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected in [SA AH Authentication Algorithm], set a 160-bit or 128-bit
hexadecimal number, respectively.
[SA AH SPI (outbound)]
Enter the SA SPI value for inbound.
Set a desired value in the range of 256 to 4294967295.
Since this setting is used as an ID for identifying the SA, be careful not to specify an inbound SPI whose value is
already used in the SPI for another AH.
130
Settings for recording video to a memory card inserted in the camera. You can also see the status of the memory card.
The content on this page is common with [Video Record] > [Memory Card] (P. 101). Settings configured in any page will be
reflected in the other pages.
Note
• The following memory cards can be used.
– SD memory card, SDHC memory card, SDXC memory card
– microSD memory card, microSDHC memory card, microSDXC memory card
• For inserting and removing the memory card, please refer to “Installation Guide” > “Using a Memory Card”.
• Only H.264(1) video can be recorded to a memory card. [H.264(2)] cannot be recorded.
• When a large number of files have been recorded onto a memory card, the Recorded Video Utility (P. 240) can take a considerable
amount of time to process the video list (the greater the number of files, the longer it will take). Please reduce the number of days saved
in [Auto Video Delete], or manually delete unneeded files with the Recorded Video Utility, on a regular basis.
The number of files saved on the memory card can greatly be reduced, by using H.264 as the video format, instead of JPEG
Video Record Setting
Sets whether to record video from the camera to a memory card or upload it with HTTP or FTP.
These can also be set with [Video Record] > [Upload] (P. 96) and will be reflected in [Video Record Setting] here.
[Video Record Action]
Select [Record to Memory Card] to record to a memory card.
Memory Card Operations
The setting items will change depending on the memory card status (unmounted/mounted).
Memory Card Operations and Information Display
[Memory Card]
Important
Information recorded to the memory card may be regarded as “personal information”. Take sufficient precautions for handling this
information when releasing to third parties for disposal, transfer or repair.
Important
Be sure to perform the unmount process when turning off the power to the camera or removing the memory card. Failing to unmount first
may result in management file problems or the memory card becoming inaccessible.
You can use the Camera Management Tool (P. 36) to batch mount/unmount memory cards from multiple cameras.
R11 R10
M741
M740
M641
M640
Setting Page
4
131
Mount Status
The memory card will be automatically mounted when you insert it into the memory card slot. It will also be
automatically mounted if it has been inserted in the memory card slot when the camera starts up.
[Mount/Unmount]
Click [Unmount] to unmount the memory card.
Be sure to unmount the memory card when turning off the power to the camera or removing the memory card.
[Operation Settings]
Select the data to save to the memory card.
For details on the video saved when [Save Logs and Videos] has been set,
please refer to “Saved Data and Data
Organization of Memory Card” (P. 250).
Note
New files cannot be saved to the memory card if there is no free space.
[Video Format]
Select the video format to record to a memory card.
Video is recorded in this format when [Video Record Action] is set to [Record to Memory Card].
Video size and quality of the recorded video follow the settings in [Video Settings] (P. 72).
Note
• When set to [JPEG] and an upload error occurs, the frame rate of video recorded in JPEG format is always 1 fps.
• When a network error occurs interrupting the transmission of recording-mode stream video, video is saved in the JPEG format
regardless of the [Video Format] setting (the frame rate is fixed at 1 fps).
[Pre-event Buffer (number of frames)] (JPEG)/ [Pre-event Buffer (sec)] (H.264(1))
Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be buffered before the event.
Enter the maximum number of frames for [JPEG] or the maximum number of seconds for [H.264(1)] in [Video
Format].
Depending on conditions, however, saving the set number of frames or seconds may not be possible.
[Post-event Buffer (number of frames)] (JPEG)/ [Post-event Buffer (sec)] (H.264(1))
Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be buffered after the event.
Enter the maximum number of frames for [JPEG] or the maximum number of seconds for [H.264(1)] in [Video
Format].
Depending on conditions, however, saving the set number of frames or seconds may not be possible.
Important
For [H.264(1)], the following settings must be configured in [Video Settings] > [H.264(1)] (P. 73).
– [Bit Rate Control]: [Use bit rate control]
– [Target Bit Rate (kbps)]: [3072] or less
– [I Frame Interval (sec)]: [0.5], [1] or [1.5]
132
[Overwrite videos]
Select whether to allow overwriting data when the available space on the memory card becomes too low while
recording video to a memory card due to an event being triggered.
If you select [Enable], videos recorded due to an event, timer or ONVIF will be overwritten starting from the oldest file.
[Auto Video Delete]
Select to automatically delete video from the memory card that has exceeded the [Days Saved] setting.
If you select [Enable], set [Days Saved] and [Delete Time].
[Days Saved]
Enter the number of days video recorded to the memory card should be saved.
[Delete Time]
Enter the time to delete video that has exceeded the [Days Saved] setting.
[Recreate Video Management Information]
If you click [Exec], the management information file for recorded video will be recreated on the memory card.
The memory card cannot be accessed during this process. It is also recommended that users not upload or stream
video from the camera.
The more files that are involved in the recreation of video management information, the longer the process will take-
and may require several hours to process.
[Format]
Click [Exec] to format the memory card.
Formatting erases all files and directories on the memory card.
Unmount Status
If a memory card is not inserted into the camera, or if you click [Unmount] in [Memory Card Operations], the memory
card status will change to unmounted.
[Mount/Unmount]
Click [Mount] to change the status of an inserted memory card to mounted.
For details on [Operation Settings], [Video Format], [Pre-event Buffer], [Post-event Buffer], [Overwrite videos], [Auto
Video Delete], [Days Saved], [Delete Time] and [Format],
please refer to “Mount Status” (P. 131).
Memory Card Information
Displays the status of the memory card inserted in the camera and information about card capacity.
Setting Page
4
133
[Memory Card Recognition]
Displays the current status of the memory card.
[Memory Card Operation Status]
Displays the operation status of the memory card.
[Operable]: Status of various possible operations.
[Recreating video management information]: This status indicates that video management information is being recreated.
Other operations cannot be performed.
[Deleting videos]: This status indicates that videos are being deleted. Other operations cannot be performed.
[Video Management Information Status]
Displays the status of the video management information.
[Normal]: This status indicates that video management information is normal.
[Video Management Information Recreation Required]: This status indicates that management files are corrupted or not
consistent with saved video files.
It is necessary to click [Exec] in [Recreate Video Management Information] to recreate the management file.
If the management files are not recreated even when [Recreate Video Management Information] is used, [Format]
(P. 132) must be used.
[Video Saving]
Displays whether videos can be saved to the memory card.
[Cannot Save] may occur for the following reasons.
• Memory card is not mounted.
• The video management file is corrupted.
• The card is write-protected.
• The memory card is full and [Overwrite videos] is set to [Disable].
[Memory Card Capacity]
Displays the current capacity of the memory card.
[Used Capacity]
Displays the current used capacity of the memory card.
Note
For details on data saved to the memory card, please refer to “Memory Card Data” (P. 250).
134
Check camera information, such as the firmware version, and perform maintenance on the camera system.
Device Information
Displays information about the connected camera.
Tool
You can display camera logs and settings, initialize and backup/restore settings.
[View Logs]
Display a history of camera operations and connections to each viewer, etc.
[View Current Settings]
Display a list of current settings for the Setting Page.
[View License]
Display information on 3rd party software licenses.
[Reboot]
Reboot the camera.
[Restore Default Settings]
Except for the following settings, all user settings will be discarded and returned to the default settings after rebooting.
• Administrator password of the basic settings, LAN, IPv4, IPv6
• Date and Time
• Host access restrictions for security
•SSL/TLS
Display Camera Device Information and Perform
Maintenance [Maintenance]
Caution
You must not turn off the camera while [Restore Default Settings], [Back Up Settings] or [Restore Settings] are in operation.
Turning off the camera at this stage may result in disabling its ability to boot correctly.
Setting Page
4
135
•802.1X
Note
• It is recommended that you note down each current setting before you click [Exec] in [Restore Default Settings].
• The camera can be restored to factory default settings using the reset switch as well. Note, however, that this will reset all camera
settings to factory default settings except for date and time (P. 270).
[Back Up Settings]
All settings, except date and time, will be backed up to the memory card.
The IP address, certificates used by SSL and 802.1X and private key will also be backed up.
[Restore Settings]
Restores all settings, except date and time, from the memory card backup file created with [Back Up Settings].
The IP address, certificates used by SSL and 802.1X and private key will also be restored.
After restore is completed, the camera will be rebooted.
[Refresh Drive System]
Cleans the connection parts inside the camera.
When [Exec] is clicked, the pan operation is performed for two cycles each of left and right and then the camera returns to
the camera angle before execution when the operation completes.
Using this may be effective if panning causes problems with the video and audio.
Note
The following users will be disconnected while refreshing the drive system.
– All users except for administrators
– Users not connected via RTP
Important
If you restore a backup file from another camera, you may encounter problems, such as address collisions on the network.
R11
R10
136
Chapter
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
Access the Viewers included on the camera with a web browser to view and use live video, and configure
those display settings.
138
Two types of Viewers are included on the camera, the Admin Viewer and the VB Viewer.
All panels are opened in these sample screenshots.
Major Differences Between the Admin Viewer and the VB Viewer
The scope of operations for Admin Viewer and VB Viewer differ.
Admin Viewer:
This viewer, in addition to using video, gives users administrative controls, such as for shooting conditions or event
detection display.
VB Viewer:
This viewer is limited to basic image operations for viewing images.
Viewer Access Restrictions
Besides administrators, authorized users and guest users can access the Viewers.
The Viewers each user can access depend on the granted access privileges (P. 118).
Administrator:
This user is granted full privileges and can launch the Admin Viewer and VB Viewer. The user name is fixed to “root”.
The administrator can prohibit all camera access from guest users by revoking all privileges for authorized users and guest
users.
Authorized user:
This user can launch the Admin Viewer and VB Viewer if privileged camera control has been granted.
It is necessary to register the user name and password (P. 118).
Guest user:
This user can only use a limited set of functions. Guest users can launch the VB Viewer.
The four types of privileges for using the Viewers are privileged camera control, camera control, video distribution and
audio distribution.
Admin Viewer and VB Viewer
Admin Viewer VB Viewer
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
139
The scope of each privilege and whether it can be granted to a user is shown below.
Note
• The factory default setting gives privileged camera control to [Authorized User] as well.
• If you disable all guest user privileges, the user authentication dialog box will appear when you launch the VB Viewer. When the name
and password for an authorized user or administrator are entered, the VB Viewer can be used with authorized user or administrator
privileges, respectively.
Privilege
Privileged Camera
Control
Camera Control Video Distribution Audio Distribution
Scope of Privilege Admin Viewer Use VB Viewer Use
View Video With VB
Viewer
Receive or Audio with
Admin Viewer/VB
Viewer
Grant to Authorized Users Yes Yes Yes Yes
Grant to Guest Users No Yes Yes Yes
Important
The Admin Viewer launched by an administrator can access only one camera at a time. While administrator privileges are used to
access the camera from a given computer, access with administrator privileges from other computers will not be granted.
In contrast, the camera can be accessed simultaneously by multiple instances of the Admin Viewer launched by [Authorized Users] from
different computers. Take note, however, that when controlling the camera, the control privileges are given to the user who accessed the
camera most recently.
140
Launch the Admin Viewer to check the camera status and view video, and to configure settings.
Launch the Admin Viewer
A user authentication window appears.
Launches the Admin Viewer.
Note
• You can also launch the Admin Viewer from the Camera Management Tool. For details, please refer to the “Camera Management
Tool User Manual”.
• You can also launch the Admin Viewer by clicking [Admin Viewer] in the upper right of the [Admin Tools] page (P. 193).
• In environments without a proxy server, select [Internet options] > [Connections] tab > [LAN settings] and clear the
[Automatically detect settings] check box in Internet Explorer.
Exit the Viewer
Close the web browser to exit the Viewer.
View Video With Admin Viewer
Important
The Admin Tools Certificate must be installed on a computer to use the Admin Viewer (P. 28).
1
Launch the camera top page and click [Admin Viewer] (P. 41).
2
Enter a user name and password (P. 42) and click [OK].
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
141
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer Screen
Basic operations not requiring administrator privileges are the same for both Viewers.
Admin Viewer
VB Viewer
(1) Video Display Area
Displays video received from the camera.
(2) Video Size
Set the size and format of video received from the camera (Admin viewer only) (P. 143).
R11
R10
M641 M640
M741
M740
(2) (3) (4) (5)
(6)
(25)(8) (26)
(27)
(12) (13)(11)(10)
(14)
(9)
(15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23)
(7)
(1)
R11
M641
M741
R11 R10
M641
M640
M741
M740
(2) (3) (4)
(7)
(8)
(13)
(11)
(10)
(14)
(9)
(18) (20) (21)
(23)
(24)
(12)
(1)
(5)
R11
M641
M741
142
(3) Video Display Size
Set the display size of the video shown on the screen (P. 144).
(4) [Full Screen Mode] Button
Video is displayed in full screen mode (P. 144).
(5) [Reconnect] Button
Reconnects to the camera.
(6) [Audio Transmission] Button
Displays the Audio Transmission panel (P. 156).
(7) [Audio Reception] Button
Displays the Audio Reception panel (P. 155).
(8) Use the pan, tilt and zoom sliders.
Drag the sliders to pan (horizontally), tilt (vertically) or zoom in (telephoto)/zoom out (wide-angle) the camera
(P. 148).
(9) Information Display
Information messages, warning messages and error messages are displayed (P. 143).
(10) Preset Selection Menu
Select presets registered to the camera (P. 154).
(11) [Home Position] Button
Move the camera angle to the home position(P. 154).
(12) [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] Button
Obtain and release the camera control privileges (P. 147).
(13) [BLC] (Back Light Compensation) Button
Turns on/off backlight compensation. This control is effective when the video is dark due to backlight (P. 155).
(14) [Snapshot] Button
Open the snapshot panel and display a still image of the moment you clicked the button (P. 186).
(15) Memory card mount status icon
Displays the camera’s memory card mount status.
: Memory card is mounted.
: memory card is not mounted.
(16) [Memory Card Recording] Button
Start and stop video recording to a memory card (P. 186). You can use this when a memory card is mounted
and you have obtained camera control privileges.
(17) [Recorded Video Utility] Button
Launches the Recorded Video Utility (P. 240).
(18) [Switch Area Zoom/Drag to Move] Button
Switch between Area Zoom and Drag to Move functions for dragging in the video display area (P. 149).
(19) [Event Display] button
Display the Event Display panel (P. 184).
(20) [Viewer PTZ] Button
Displays the viewer PTZ panel (P. 151).
(21) [Panorama Display] Button
Displays the panorama display panel (P. 151).
(22) [Control for Admin] Button
Displays the Control for Admin panel (P. 158).
(23) [Digital PTZ] Button
Display the Digital PTZ panel (P. 153).
(24) Control Privilege Display
Displays the control privileges retention status (P. 188).
(25) [Setting Page]
The screen switches to the Setting Page.
R11
M641 M741
R11
M641
M741
R11
R10
R11
R10
M641
M640 M741 M740
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
143
(26) [Back to top]
The screen switches to the top page of the camera.
(27) Admin Control Panel
Allows various camera operations with administrator privileges (P. 158).
Check Information
Information, such as the frame rate, camera pan/tilt/zoom values and descriptions of each function, appears in the
Information Display.
Warnings and error message will also appear here if there are problems with camera operations or systems.
For details on the information displayed, please refer to “List of Viewer Messages” (P. 269).
Change the Video Size and Display Screen Size
You can set the video size to receive from the camera and the size to display on the computer screen.
Change the Video Size
Select the video size to receive from the camera with the video size setting in the upper left of the Viewer.
The sizes that can be selected depend on the setting in [Basic Settings] > [Video Settings] > [All Videos] > [Video
Size Set] on the Setting Page (P. 72).
Important
• When [Camera] > [Camera Settings] > [Camera Control] > [Image Stabilizer] (P. 75) is enabled on the Setting Page, the actual angle
of view of the video will be smaller than the pan/tilt/zoom values shown in the Information Display.
• The actual angle of view will also be smaller than the angle of view (frame) (P. 151) displayed in the panorama display panel.
Information Display
R11
R10
144
* When [Enable H.264 reception] is selected in [Control for Admin] > [Video Reception] (P. 168), H.264 video sizes
will be added to the menu display.
Change the Display Screen Size
You can change the size of the video display area screen with the display size setting in the upper left of the Viewer.
The sizes that can be configured depend on the setting in [Basic Settings] > [Video Settings] > [All Videos] > [Video
Size Set] on the Setting Page (P. 72).
Displaying in Full Screen Mode
You can display the video display area in full screen mode by clicking the [Full Screen Mode] button in the upper
right of the Viewer.
To exit full screen mode
Use the following methods to return normal display.
• Click that appears in the lower right of full screen.
• Right-click on the screen and select [Exit Full Screen Mode] from the menu that appears.
[Video Size Set] Setting
Selectable video size
JPEG H.264*
1280x720 / 640x360 / 320x180
320x180
640 x 360
1280 x 720
• The sizes set with [Video Size] in [Basic Settings] > [Video
Settings] > [H.264(1)] or [H.264(2)] in the Setting Page
(P. 73), determine the sizes displayed to the menu.
1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 / 320 x 240
320 x 240
640 x 480
1280 x 960
• When [H.264(2)] is set to [Enable] in [Basic Settings] >
[Video Settings] > [H.264(2)] in the Setting Page (P. 74),
[H.264(1)] and [H.264(2)] video sizes are both displayed to
the menu.
[Video Size Set] Setting Selectable Screen Size Remarks
1280x720 / 640x360 / 320x180
Actual Pixels
480 x 270
640 x 360
1280 x 720
Fit to Window
[Actual Pixels] displays the video at
the size at which it is being captured.
[Fit to Window] displays the video at
the maximum size possible in the
web browser window.
1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 / 320 x 240
Actual Pixels
480 x 360
640 x 480
1280 x 960
Fit to Window
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
145
Context Menu
While in full screen mode, right-click the mouse to open a menu necessary for camera control.
[Start/Stop Control]
Obtain and release the camera control privileges.
[Preset]
Select a preset.
[Home Position]
Move the camera angle to the home position.
[Panorama]
Displays the panorama display panel.
[Start/Exit Viewer PTZ]
Displays the viewer PTZ panel.
[Start/Exit Digital PTZ]
Display the Digital PTZ panel.
[Control]
Display a panel containing the zoom slider, [Backlight Compensation] button and [Obtain/Release Camera Control
Privileges] button.
[Pan/Tilt Slider]
Display the pan and tilt sliders.
[Control for Admin]
Displays the Control for Admin panel.
[Drag to Move Mode/Area Zoom Mode]
Switch between Area Zoom and Drag to Move functions for dragging in the video display area.
[Video Capture Size]
Switches the video capture size.
[Snapshot]
Take a snapshot.
[Audio Reception]
Displays the Audio Reception panel.
[Audio Transmission]
Displays the Audio Transmission panel.
[Event Display]
Display the Event Display panel.
[Start/Stop Memory Card Recording]
Start and stop video recording to a memory card.
R11
R10
M641
M640
M741 M740
R11 R10
M641
M640 M741 M740
R11
R10
R11
M641 M741
R11
M641 M741
146
[Exit Full Screen Mode]
Exit full screen mode.
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
147
This explains how to set the camera angle using the Admin Viewer. This also explains audio transmission/reception using
an external device connected to the camera.
Obtain Camera Control Privileges
To use the camera, you must obtain control privileges with the Viewer.
If you have not yet obtained camera control privileges, click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button.
You will obtain control privileges and be able to use the buttons on the Viewer.
The center of the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button turns green while you have control privileges.
Use Pan/Tilt/Zoom
You can pan, tilt and zoom the camera to set the camera angle.
Note
• You must obtain control privileges to pan, tilt or zoom the camera.
• Camera operations performed by clicking or dragging will not be precise.
• Users operating the Admin Viewer with the administrator privileges can control the camera outside the view restrictions. Users operating
the Admin Viewer with authorized user privileges can control the camera only within the view restrictions.
Operate the Camera With Admin Viewer
Important
• Multiple users cannot obtain control privileges simultaneously.
• If the Admin Viewer obtains control privileges while the VB Viewer has control privileges, the control privileges for the VB Viewer will be
overridden.
• At any time, the administrator can launch the Admin Viewer to override the control privileges of another instance of the Admin Viewer
launched by [Authorized User]. The administrator can retain the control privileges, but doing so prevents authorized users from
obtaining control privileges. Once finished, the administrator should always exit the Viewer or click the [Obtain/Release Camera
Control Privileges] button to release the control privileges.
Camera control privileges not obtained
Control privileges obtained
R11 R10
148
Click on the Video Display Area or Use the Sliders
Move by Clicking on the Video Display Area
If you click in the video display area, the camera angle will change to center on the mouse pointer location. If the
camera angle does not center on the desired location with a single click, repeat the operation.
Note
While using the Viewer PTZ, clicking on the video display area does not work.
Move Using the Sliders
Drag the pan and tilt sliders to pan and tilt the camera.
Drag the zoom slider to zoom the camera.
The slider can also move by clicking directly on the slider bar..
Slider When Using Digital Zoom
If you set [Camera] > [Camera Settings] > [Camera Control] > [Digital Zoom] to [Enable] on the Setting Page, the
digital zoom range will appear on the zoom slider and you will be able to use digital zoom.
Note
The higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the video quality.
Use [Pan/Tilt/Zoom] in Control for Admin
You can pan, tilt and zoom the camera with [Control for Admin] > [Pan/Tilt/Zoom].
Zoom Slider
Drag upward to zoom in (telephoto), drag
downward to zoom out (wide-angle).
Tilt Slider
Move the camera vertically.
Pan Slider
Move the camera horizontally.
Digital Zoom Maximum Telephoto
Digital Zoom Range
Optical telephoto end
Max. Wide-Angle
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
149
The [Pan/Tilt/Zoom] controls appears.
(1) [Pan/Tilt]
The camera angle will change in the direction of each arrow. Operation will continue while you hold the button
down and stop when you release it.
Click the center button to center the camera at 0° pan, 45° tilt (When upright. -45° when ceiling mounted).
(2) [Pan/Tilt Speed]
Select the pan/tilt speed when using the [Pan/Tilt] buttons.
[Control speed by zoom position]
When selected, the pan/tilt speed will be slower in the telephoto zoom range, and faster in wide-angle zoom
range.
Note
You can select this when [Camera] > [Camera Settings] > [Camera Control] > [Pan/Tilt Speed Control] (P. 76) is set to [Control at
set speed]. If [Pan/Tilt Speed Control] is set to [Control by zoom position], [Control speed by zoom position] cannot be deselected.
(3) [Zoom]
Click the buttons to zoom in and zoom out. Operation will continue while you hold the button down and stop
when you release it.
(4) [Zoom Speed]
Select the zoom speed when using the [Zoom] buttons.
Note
The pan/tilt/zoom operation speed using the sliders and the panorama display will not change even if you change the [Pan/Tilt
Speed] or [Zoom Speed] settings.
Use Area Zoom/Drag to Move
You can drag on the video display area to zoom in and out, and change the camera angle.
Note
You cannot not use Area Zoom or Drag to Move when using Viewer PTZ.
1
Display Control for Admin (P. 158).
2
Click [Pan/Tilt/Zoom].
(2)
(4)
(1)
(3)
150
Use Area Zoom to Zoom In and Out
Drag left-to-right to define an area to zoom in on.
Drag right-to-left to draw out a rectangle in which will appear a preview of the video display area that will be
zoomed out to.
When operating in Area Zoom mode, an icon (zoom in: ; zoom out: ) appears in the rectangle.
To stop Area Zoom, right-click while holding the left button while the rectangle is displayed.
When dragged left-to-right, the camera will zoom in until the area in the rectangle fills the video display area.
When dragged right-to-left, the camera will zoom out, centered around the area in the rectangle.
Use Drag to Move to Change the Camera Angle
The camera angle will move in the direction of the arrow.
Movement speed increases with the length of the arrow. The maximum length of the arrow is half the width and
height of the video display area, and corresponds with the maximum movement speed.
1
Click the [Switch Area Zoom/Drag to Move] button to enter Area Zoom ( ) mode.
2
Drag out a rectangle in the video display area.
3
Release the mouse button.
1
Click the [Switch Area Zoom/Drag to Move] button to enter Drag to Move ( ) mode.
2
In the video display area, drag in the direction you would like to change the camera angle. An arrow will appear.
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
151
Note
• The direction of the arrow will not change even when using Auto Flip (P. 76).
• When using Drag to Move, the sliders will not move while the cameras moves.
The camera will stop.
Operate Camera With Panorama Display Panel
You can operate the camera using the frames within the panorama display area.
To use a panorama image in the panorama display panel, you must create the image and save it to the camera
(P. 201).
The panorama display panel appears.
The frame indicates the area being captured by the current camera.
Move or Zoom by Dragging
Click inside the frame and drag it to pan and tilt the camera.
If you click and drag outside the frame, a new frame will be drawn. The camera will pan/tilt/zoom to capture the
area in the frame.
If you drag an edge of the frame to change its size, the camera will zoom in or out to capture the area in the
frame.
Move by Clicking
If you click outside the frame, the frame will move and center on that point, panning and tilting the camera.
Magnify and Display Part of Video (Viewer PTZ)
User the Viewer PTZ to magnify part of a video (using digital zoom) without moving the camera.
When you do not want to move the camera to pan, tilt or zoom, this still allows you to take advantage of functions, such as
the Intelligent Function.
Note
• You cannot record the video magnified with the Viewer PTZ.
• You can display the magnified video in full screen mode when using the Viewer PTZ.
3
Release the mouse button.
1
Click the [Panorama Display] button.
2
Use the frame in the panorama display panel to pan/tilt/zoom the camera.
Frame
Important
While using the Viewer PTZ, you cannot operate the camera by clicking or dragging in the video display area.
R11 R10
152
The Viewer PTZ panel appears.
Initially, the preview frame (orange) surrounds the entire video.
The video of the area inside the preview frame is magnified to fill the video display area.
Move or Resize by Dragging
Press the mouse button inside the frame and drag it to move the preview frame.
If you press the mouse button and drag outside the frame, a new preview frame will be drawn.
You can resize the preview frame by dragging an edge of the frame.
Move by Clicking
If you click outside the frame, the preview frame will move and center on that point.
Move Using the Sliders
You can use the pan, tilt and zoom sliders in the video display area to move the preview frame.
Note
The Viewer PTZ uses digital zoom, so the higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the quality of the video.
Exiting Viewer PTZ
When you click the [Viewer PTZ] button while using the Viewer PTZ, the Viewer PTZ panel closes and you exit the
Viewer PTZ.
Note
• If you close the Viewer PTZ panel without exiting the Viewer PTZ, the view in the video display area will remain magnified.
However, when you reconnect to the Admin Viewer, the initial state will be restored.
1
Click the [Viewer PTZ] button.
2
In the Viewer PTZ panel, drag an edge of the preview frame to make it smaller.
3
Move the frame to the area you would like to magnify and resize the frame as desired.
Preview Frame
M641
M640
M741
M740
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
153
• The [Viewer PTZ] button display will change as follows depending on whether or not you are using the Viewer PTZ.
You are not using the Viewer PTZ (video being received by the camera appears in the video display area)
You are using the Viewer PTZ (magnified video appears in the video display area)
Cropping and Displaying Part of an Image (Digital PTZ)
You can use the Digital PTZ panel to crop and display part of a camera image in the image display area. It is also possible
to use a preset or home position registered to the camera.
Digital PTZ
Digital PTZ is a function that allows easy panning, tilting, and zooming by transmitting only a part of the camera
effective pixel area without moving the camera lens position that was adjusted during camera installation.
Note
If Digital PTZ is enabled while receiving H.264 video, the received video changes to JPEG format.
Differences Between Digital PTZ and Viewer PTZ
Digital PTZ and Viewer PTZ are both functions allowing easy panning, tilting and zooming using the digital zoom, but
they have the following differences because they employ different operating principles.
Crop Video With Digital PTZ Panel
The Digital PTZ panel appears.
The preview frame operations are the same as with the Viewer PTZ (P. 152).
The preview frame size can be set to any of 5 sizes. The screen sizes that can be selected change as follows
depending on the setting in [Basic Settings] > [Video Settings] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] on the Setting
Page.
• [1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 / 320 x 180] selected: 640x360, 512x288, 384x216, 256x144, 128x72
• [1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 / 320 x 240] selected: 640x480, 512x384, 384x288, 256x192, 128x96
Note
The preview frame will move in steps. Fine-tuned movement is not possible.
The video of the area inside the manipulated preview frame is magnified to fill the video display area.
M641
M640 M741
M740
Digital PTZ Viewer PTZ
Transmits only the cropped part of the entire area that
can be captured by the camera.
Enlarges the specified part of the video transmitted from
the camera and then displays it in the viewer.
The size of the received data is small. The size of the received data is large.
Independent operation cannot be performed by each
Viewer. If multiple Viewers are connected, the same
Digital PTZ display is applied to the other Viewers.
PTZ operation can be performed independently for each
Viewer.
1
Click the [Digital PTZ] button.
2
In the Digital PTZ panel, move and resize the preview frame.
M641
M640
M741
M740
154
Note
The Digital PTZ uses digital zoom, so the higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the video quality.
Using Presets or the Home Position
You can use a registered preset or home position to specify the range for Digital PTZ.
Select a preset from the preset selection menu (P. 142) to move the preview frame on the Digital PTZ panel to the
preset position and display the video inside the frame in the video display area.
Click the [Home Position] button to move the preview frame on the Digital PTZ panel to the home position and display
the video inside the frame in the video display area.
Note
Register presets and the home position beforehand in [Control for Admin] (P. 170).
Exiting Digital PTZ
When you click the [Digital PTZ] button while using the Viewer PTZ, the Digital PTZ panel closes and you exit Digital
PTZ.
Note
• If you close the Digital PTZ panel without exiting Digital PTZ, Digital PTZ continues to operate. However, when you reconnect to
the Admin Viewer, the initial state will be restored.
• The [Digital PTZ] button display will change as follows depending on whether or not you are using Digital PTZ.
You are not using Digital PTZ (video being received by the camera appears in the video display area)
You are using Digital PTZ (cropped video appears in the video display area)
Using Presets or the Home Position
It is possible to control the camera using a preset or home position registered to the camera in advance.
When you click the preset selection menu and select a preset from the list that appears, the camera will move to the camera
angle of the selected preset.
Clicking the [Home Position] button will move the camera angle to the home position.
Preview Frame
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
155
Note
Register presets and the home position beforehand with [Preset Registration] tab in [Control for Admin] > [Preset/Initial Setting] > [Preset
Setting] (P. 170). The registered preset will appear in the preset selection menu.
Use Backlight Compensation
Click [BLC] to brighten video that is dark due to backlight.
Click the button again to cancel backlight compensation.
Note
Use Smart Shade Control (P. 159) if over-exposure of highlights is prominent in the video.
Receive/Transmit Audio
Receive audio from the camera, transmit audio from the Viewers and configure the respective volume settings.
Note
When you are using Internet Explorer 11 in a 64-bit operating system and the camera is registered as a trusted site and protected mode is
enabled, reception and transmission of audio will be disabled.
Receive Audio
Receive audio from the microphone connected to the camera and play it back in the Viewer.
Important
• The [BLC] button is not available if [Smart Shade Control] (P. 159) is set to [Auto].
• The [BLC] button is not available if [Exposure] (P. 162) is set to [Manual].
[Home Position] Button
Preset Selection Menu
R11
M641
M741
156
The Audio Reception panel appears.
Use the [Output Volume] slider to adjust the volume as needed.
The [Audio Reception] button icon will change to while receiving audio.
Note
• To receive audio, you must set [Server] > [Audio Server] > [Audio Transmission from the Camera] to [Enable] in the Setting Page
beforehand (P. 92).
• The first time the Audio Reception panel is opened with the VB Viewer, a message to install the “Canon Network Camera Audio
Receiver” add-on will appear in the information bar of the web browser. Install the add-on.
• If you select [Receive audio] in the Audio Reception panel, you will continue to receive audio even if you close the panel.
• To use the audio function in environments that use a proxy server, select in Internet Explorer [Use a proxy server for your LAN] in
[Internet options] > [Connections] tab > [LAN settings] > [Proxy server], then specify the camera IP address in [Advanced] >
[Exceptions].
• If you click ([Reconnect] button) and reconnect, audio reception will stop and camera control will be released.
Transmit Audio
You can use the Admin Viewer to transmit audio received from an external device connected to the computer to a
speaker with an amplifier connected to the camera.
The Audio Transmission panel appears.
Audio transmission starts.
Use the [Input Volume] slider to adjust the volume as needed.
1
Click the [Audio Reception] button.
2
Select [Receive audio].
1
Click the [Audio Transmission] button.
2
Click the microphone button.
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
157
The [Audio Transmission] button icon will change to while transmitting audio.
Note
• To transmit audio, you must set [Server] > [Audio Server] > [Audio Reception from Viewer] to [Enable] in the Setting Page
beforehand (P. 92).
• Audio transmission will continue even if you close the Audio Transmission panel.
• To use the audio function in environments that use a proxy server, select in Internet Explorer [Use a proxy server for your LAN] in
[Internet options] > [Connections] tab > [LAN settings] > [Proxy server], then specify the camera IP address in [Advanced] >
[Exceptions].
• Only [Administrator] can transmit audio from the Viewer.
3
Select the amount of time to transmit audio with [Audio sending time limit].
158
You can use the Control for Admin panel to operate the camera, configure video quality and reception settings, register
presets and perform other tasks.
By clicking [Initial Setting Registration] in [Preset/Initial Setting] (P. 159), you can apply the settings in Control for Admin to
each of the setting items in [Camera] > [Initial Setting] (P. 79) in the Setting Page. Additionally, settings configured in [Initial
Setting] in the Setting Page will be applied to each setting item in [Control for Admin].
Control for Admin Panel
Display Control for Admin Panel
If the Control for Admin panel is closed, obtain camera control privileges and click the [Control for Admin] button.
The Control for Admin panel appears.
Note
You can open the various control items even without obtaining camera control privileges, but you will only be able to configure
settings for the [Preset/Initial Settings] and [Video Reception] items.
Open/Close and Move Control Items
Click the title of a control item to open or close it.
You can also reorder control items using the up/down buttons.
Use Control for Admin
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
159
Pan / Tilt / Zoom
Pan, tilt and zoom the camera, as well as configure the speed settings for those operations.
For details, please refer to “Use [Pan/Tilt/Zoom] in Control for Admin” (P. 148).
Preset / Initial Setting Registration
Preset Setting
Register presets and the home position, configure the preset tour route and preset auto control settings.
For details, please refer to “Register Presets” (P. 170).
Initial Setting Registration
When you click [Initial Setting Registration], each of the current settings for the items in Control for Admin, except the
following items, will be registered to [Camera] > [Initial Setting] in the Setting Page.
• [Video Reception]
• [External Device Output]
A confirmation message appears, when you click [Initial Setting Registration].
If [yes] is clicked, the present pan/tilt/zoom position, as well as the camera settings, are registered. If [No] is clicked,
only the present camera setting values are registered. If [cancel] is clicked, nothing is registered, and the message is
closed.
Smart Shade Control
If the background is bright and the subject is hard to see, this function brightens dark areas without affecting bright areas to
make the subject easier to see.
This is different than Backlight Compensation (P. 155). This function suppresses over-exposure of highlights while
compensating for under-exposure in dark areas of the video.
R11
R10
R11
M641 M741
160
(1) Smart Shade Control Modes
[Auto]
Combines Smart Shade Control and Exposure Compensation to automatically adjust the video so that there are no
over-exposed or under-exposed areas.
[Manual]
Use buttons in (2) to manually set the compensation strength.
[Not used]
Disables Smart Shade Control.
(2) Smart Shade Control level
When Smart Shade Control is set to [Manual], set a compensation level.
Note
• When [Auto] or [Manual] is selected for Smart Shade Control, the video data size increases.
• When [Manual] is selected for Smart Shade Control, setting a high compensation level may increase video noise. If noise is noticeable,
lower the control level.
Haze Compensation
If the subject is obscured by haze, this adjusts contrast in the video to improve subject visibility.
(1) Haze Compensation Modes
[Auto]
Automatically uses Compensation Removal.
[Manual]
Use buttons in (2) to manually set the compensation strength.
Important
• [Auto] cannot be selected for [Smart Shade Control] if [Exposure] (P. 162) is set to [Manual].
• If you set [Haze Compensation] to [Auto] or [Manual], [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Disable].
OFF Smart Shade Control Backlight Compensation
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
161
[Not used]
Disables Haze Compensation.
(2) Haze Compensation Strength
When Haze Compensation is set to [Manual], set a strength level.
Note
• When [Auto] or [Manual] is selected for [Haze Compensation], the video data size increases.
• When using [Haze Compensation], contrast may be strong if the subject is not obscured by haze. If this happens, set [Haze
Compensation] to [Manual] and set a lower Haze Compensation strength.
Focus
This focuses on the subject.
(1) [Auto]
Automatically focuses on the subject.
(2) [Manual]
If you push and hold the (Far) (Near) buttons, you can adjust the focus toward telephoto or wide-angle
respectively.
When you click [One-shot AF], the camera will focus once using autofocus and then switch to manual focus.
(3) [Fixed at Infinity]
The focus is fixed at infinity where a camera focal point is unnecessary.
Focus Ranges
The estimated focus ranges for [Auto] and [Fixed at infinity] depending on the [Day/Night] setting are shown in the
following table.
Important
If you set [Smart Shade Control] to [Auto] or [Manual], [Haze Compensation] is set to [Disable].
Important
• The focus set with the Admin Viewer will be applied to other users.
• Depending on the lighting used, focus may not be maintained when switching between [Day Mode] and [Night Mode]. Focus when
switching Day/Night Mode can be set in the [Day/Night Mode Focus Settings] panel in the Admin Viewer (P. 165).
• If you select [Manual] for [Exposure] (P. 162) and set the shutter speed to [1/1 sec], focus will not be maintained with [Auto] and [One-
shot AF] in [Focus]. If this occurs, use [Manual] to set the focus.
• Note that if you set the focus manually it will remain fixed.
• In conditions where an outdoor scene is captured from an indoor location through a glass window, the camera may focus on the glass
if there is dust or water on the surface. Install the camera at the shortest possible distance from the glass surface.
(1)
(3)
(2)
162
* Using infrared illumination from an external device may throw the camera out of focus.
For details on focus ranges, please refer to the table on P. 55.
Note
• For details on difficult to focus subjects, please refer to “Difficult to Focus Subjects” (P. 55).
• It is recommended that you check that the camera is focused whenever you restart the camera or use One-shot AF.
Exposure
Set the exposure and shutter speed.
(1) Exposure mode
[Auto]
The exposure is controlled automatically.
[Manual]
The exposure is set by adjusting the shutter speed, aperture and gain manually.
This is not available if [Smart Shade Control] (P. 159) is set to [Auto].
[Auto (Flickerless)]
Shutter speed is adjusted automatically to suit the lighting conditions. Video flickering caused by fluorescent lights,
etc., is reduced.
[Auto (Shutter-priority AE)]
The aperture is adjusted automatically to suit the specified shutter speed.
Note
If [Auto] is selected in [Camera] > [Initial Setting] > [Day/Night] on the Setting Page, select [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)] or [Auto (Shutter-
priority AE)] for [Exposure].
(2) [Exposure Compensation]
When you select [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)] or [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] for [Exposure], you can adjust the brightness
of the video by using the slider to select the exposure compensation.
Focus Mode
Day/Night Settings
Day Mode Night Mode
Max. Wide-Angle Max. Telephoto Max. Wide-Angle Max. Telephoto
Auto/Manual
0.3 m (12 in.) –
infinity
2.0 m (6.6 ft.) –
infinity
1.0 m (3.3 ft.) –
infinity
2.0 m (6.6 ft.) –
infinity
Fixed at Infinity Fixed near infinity*
R11
R10
M641 M640 M741 M740
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6) (7)
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
163
This is not available if [Smart Shade Control] (P. 159) is set to [Auto].
(3) [Metering Mode]
When you select [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)] or [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] for [Exposure], you can select the metering
mode.
[Center-Weighted]
The entire scene is metered with an emphasis on the center.
Even when slightly darker/brighter areas are present on the periphery of the scene, an appropriate exposure can be
achieved for the subject near the center.
Use this mode if the subject is positioned near the center of the screen.
[Average]
The entire scene is metered and averaged.
A stable exposure can be achieved even in a capture environment where there are notable brightness differences
within the screen.
Use this mode to stabilize the exposure in scenes where vehicles or people are moving.
[Spot]
The center of the screen is metered.
An appropriate exposure can be achieved for the subject at the center of the screen regardless of the brightness/
darkness on the periphery of the screen.
Use this mode if you want to adjust the exposure to the center of the screen because the subject is, for example, lit by
a spotlight or backlit.
(4) [Shutter Speed]
When you select [Manual] or [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] for [Exposure], you can select the shutter speed.
If [Manual] is selected, set the shutter speed in the range of [1/1 sec] to [1/16000 sec].
If [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] is selected, set the shutter speed in the range of [1/2 sec] to [1/16000 sec].
When capturing a moving subject, selecting a higher shutter speed can reduce blurry video capture.
Setting a slow shutter speed may prevent Intelligent Function from working correctly. Select a shutter speed that suits
the capture conditions and purpose.
(5) [Slow Shutter]
If you select [Auto] or [Auto (Flickerless)] for [Exposure], select the slowest shutter speed from the range [1/2 sec] to
[1/30 sec].
Slower shutter speeds generate afterimages in video when capturing a moving subject.
(6) [Aperture]
If [Manual] is selected for [Exposure], set a desired aperture.
Moving the slider to the left closes the aperture and darkens the image. Moving the slider to the right opens the
aperture and brightens the image.
(7) [Gain]
If [Manual] is selected for [Exposure], set the sensitivity to affect brightness.
Moving the slider to the left darkens the video, moving it to the right brightens video.
Important
• If a traffic signal, electronic scoreboard, etc. is captured the video may flicker. In this case, try changing [Exposure] to [Auto (Shutter-
priority AE)] and then select a shutter speed lower than 1/100, to please refer to if the situation improves.
• Setting a slow shutter speed may prevent Intelligent Function from working correctly. Select a shutter speed that suits the capture
conditions and purpose.
164
White Balance
Set the white balance according to the light source to achieve natural color in the video.
(1) White Balance mode
[Auto]
The white balance is adjusted automatically.
[Light Source]
Select the light source from the pull-down menu in (2) to suit the camera usage.
[Manual]
Use (3) and (4) to manually adjust the white balance.
(2) Select a Light Source
If you select [Light Source] for the white balance, select a light source.
[Daylight Fluorescent]
Select this option to capture video under daylight fluorescent lighting.
[White Fluorescent]
Select this option to capture video under day white fluorescent or white fluorescent lighting.
[Warm Fluorescent]
Select this option to capture video under warm fluorescent lighting.
[Mercury Lamp]
Select this option to capture video under mercury lamps.
[Sodium Lamp]
Select this option to capture video under orange sodium lamps.
[Halogen Lamp]
Select this option to capture video under halogen lamps or incandescent bulbs.
(3) [One-shot WB]
If you set white balance to [Manual], this will force the white balance to match the light source and lock the setting.
Setting Method Example:
Illuminate a white subject (white paper, etc.) using the light source, making sure the subject fills the entire screen, and
then use [One-shot WB].
Important
• When the subject has only one color, is under low light conditions, or when sodium lamps, mercury lamps or certain other fluorescent
lighting is used, [Auto] may not adjust colors appropriately.
• If [Auto] is set, and the subject appears greenish under mercury lamps, set white balance to [Light Source] and select [Mercury
Lamp]. If the colors in the video are still not appropriate under mercury lamps even when you select [Mercury Lamp], use [One-shot
WB].
Important
Since the light source selection options are based on representative characteristics, appropriate colors may not be achieved depending
on the applicable light source. If this occurs, use the [One-shot WB] function.
(1)
(4)
(3)
(2)
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
165
(4) [R Gain], [B Gain]
If you set white balance to [Manual], use the sliders to set the Red and Blue gain values.
Day/Night
Set a capture mode suited to the brightness of the camera installation environment.
(1) Day/Night mode
[Auto]
The camera automatically determines ambient brightness and switches to Day Mode or Night Mode.
[Day Mode]
Captures normal color video.
[Night Mode]
Removes the infrared filter to increase sensitivity. Video turns to monochrome.
(2) [Day/Night Mode Focus Settings]
The focusing positions under normal lighting, such as fluorescent, and infrared illumination differ since the
wavelengths of these light sources differ. For this reason, set the focus positions for when Day/Night Mode are
switched.
This function can only be set when [Focus] is set to [Manual] (P. 161).
Click this to display the [Day/Night Mode Focus Settings] panel.
Important
• When [Day/Night] (P. 165) is set to [Night Mode] (including when it is set to [Auto] and Night Mode is judged to be applicable), the
white balance function cannot be used.
• Notes on Capturing Video Continuously Day and Night
If a subject that seldom changes is captured in a location where the light source changes gradually, such as when capturing a subject
continuously day and night, appropriate colors may not be achieved. In this case, applying changes to the image to capture will
achieve the appropriate colors.
Important
• If you use [Auto], conduct a thorough operation test to check the effectiveness of the setting beforehand.
• If you use [Auto], set [Control for Admin] > [Exposure] (P. 162) to [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)] or [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)]. Note that
depending on the shutter speed when set to [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)], however, the mode may not switch to Night Mode even if
[Auto] is selected.
• If you exit the Admin Viewer while [Day Mode] or [Night Mode] is set, these will remain in effect, even if [Camera] > [Initial Setting] >
[Day/Night] is set to [Auto] in the Setting Page.
To enable [Auto], set [Day/Night] to [Auto] before exiting the Admin Viewer.
• If you use [Auto], the infrared filter may move several times while the mode is switching between Day Mode and Night Mode. You will
not be able to use pan, tilt, zoom and manual focus during this period.
• If Night Mode will be used under infrared illumination, turn on the lighting before switching to Night Mode.
Important
• While making settings with the [Day/Night Mode Focus Settings] panel, it is not possible to make settings using the Admin Tools on
another computer.
• Even if you use [Day/Night Mode Focus Settings], focus may not be maintained in Night Mode if the light source changes (e.g. sunlight
added to infrared illumination).
(1)
(2)
166
(3) [Use One-shot AF]
This is the factory default setting. Select this to use One-shot AF when switching Day/Night Mode.
(4) [Move to registered focus position]
When switching Day/Night Mode, the focus positions preregistered for Day Mode and Night Mode in [Register focus
position] will be used. For details, please refer to “Register the Focus Positions” that follows.
(5) [Compensate for light source]
Select this option to adjust the focus position to suit the lighting being used when switching to Night Mode.
[Fluorescent]
Select this option to capture video under fluorescent, LED, sodium or mercury lighting.
[Halogen Lamp]
Select this option to capture video under halogen or incandescent lighting.
[Infrared (740nm)]
Select this option to capture video under infrared (740 nm wavelength) illumination.
[Infrared (850nm)]
Select this option to capture video under infrared (850 nm wavelength) illumination.
[Infrared (940nm)]
Select this option to capture video under infrared (940 nm wavelength) illumination.
(6) [None]
When switching Day/Night Mode, the camera automatically focuses on each of the fluorescent lighting focus positions
set beforehand for Day Mode and Night Mode.
Registering the Focus Positions
These are the steps to register the focus positions to use when switching Day/Night Mode mentioned in (4) earlier.
Important
When using [Use One-shot AF] and switching between Day/Night Mode, it may not be possible to focus on the intended subject if
another subject, such as a person, passes in front at that time.
M641
M640
M741
M740
(3)
(4)
(5)
R11
R10
(3)
(4)
(6)
M641
M640
M741
M740
R11
R10
1
Display the [Day/Night Mode Focus Settings] panel.
2
Select [Day Mode] in Day/Night Mode (P. 165).
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
167
[Registered] will appear in [Day Mode:].
[Clear the registered focus position?] will appear if you select [Use One-shot AF]
or [None], even if only one focus position has been registered for either [Day Mode] or [Night Mode].
If you select [No], the registered focus position will be retained even if you select to [Use One-shot AF] or [None].
Note
See the following for the focus ranges when using Day/Night Mode settings.
– “Focus Ranges” (P. 161)
– The table in the “Note” section of “Set the Focus” (P. 55)
Infrared
Set how infrared illumination is used.
(1) [Day/Night Operation]
Linked to Day/Night. Turns on infrared illumination in Night Mode.
(2) [Do not use]
Infrared illumination is not used.
(3) Infrared Illumination Strength
Sets the infrared illumination strength when [Day/Night Operation] is selected.
Note
If all or part of the image appears to have a white glow, there is a possibility that a wall (even a wall not in the image) is reflecting the infra-
red lighting. If this occurs, please adjust the camera angle.
External Device Output
Use external device output.
Click the icons to activate and deactivate output.
Output status is shown by the icons.
Screen Example:
Output 1: inactive
Output 2: active
3
Under the lighting conditions of the Day Mode, adjust the focus position as required while watching the video.
4
Click [Register focus position] in the [Day/Night Mode Focus Settings] panel.
5
Switch Day/Night Mode to [Night Mode].
6
Repeat steps 3 and 4 under the Night Mode lighting conditions to register the focus position.
R11
R10
M641
M640
M741
M740
Important
Infrared illumination strength can only be set when [Exposure] (P. 162) is set to [Manual].
M741
(3)
(2)
(1)
R11
M641 M741
168
Image Quality Adjustment
Adjust the quality of the video.
(1) [Noise Reduction]
Select a noise reduction level. This setting is generally more effective in low-light conditions.
When set to [Strong], the noise reduction effect is increased, but the afterimage of moving subjects becomes easier to
see.
When set to [Mild], the noise reduction effect is decreased and resolution is increased, but the video file size becomes
larger.
(2) [Sharpness]
Set a sharpness level.
When set toward [Strong] the video becomes sharper, and when set toward [Mild] the video becomes softer.
When set toward [Strong] the video file size becomes larger.
(3) [Color Saturation]
Set a color saturation level.
Video Reception
Video reception settings for the video display area.
(1) [Max. Frame Rate (JPEG)]
You can select the maximum frame rate for JPEG video.
The setting is not selectable when displaying H.264 video in the video display area.
(2) [Enable H.264 reception]
Select to receive H.264 video.
The Software Product License Agreement dialog box appears. Click [Yes] to accept the terms of the license
agreement. The decoder is downloaded from the camera, enabling H.264 video reception.
Note
When you are using Internet Explorer 11 in a 64-bit operating system and the camera is registered as a trusted site and protected mode is
enabled, reception of H.264 video will be disabled.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
169
By registering settings as presets, such as camera angles, camera settings (e.g. exposure) and Day/Night Mode switching,
the presets can be easily called up by Viewers to apply the settings.
Using Presets
In addition to immediate display of registered camera angles when operating the viewer, you can use presets as
follows.
• Execute the presets at predetermined times or during switches between Day Mode and Night Mode. (Auto Control
Settings) (P. 177)
• Automatically cycle through multiple presets at a set time and in a predetermined sequence. (Tour Route Settings)
(P. 179)
• When using the Intelligent Function, lock the monitoring position at a preset camera angle (P. 216). You can also
automatically return to a preset position after Auto Tracking completes (P. 230).
About Presets
Important
It is strongly recommended you register as presets, the positions Intelligent Function will use for the camera.
R11 R10
R11 R10
170
Use the [Preset Registration] tab to register presets and the home position.
The number of presets you can register are as follows.
• Maximum 257 presets (including the home position).
• Maximum 21 presets (including the home position).
Note
• You cannot register presets/initial settings if the Panorama Creation Tool, Privacy Mask Setting Tool, View Restriction Setting Tool or
Intelligent Function Setting Tool are running on a computer running Admin Viewer.
• You can only use one registered preset/initial setting on one computer.
• Only users with administrator privileges can register presets.
Display the Preset Setting Panel
If you click [Preset Setting] in [Control for Admin] > [Preset/Initial Setting], the Preset Setting panel will appear.
Note
The following panels will also appear with the Preset Setting panel.
– Panorama Display Panel
– Digital PTZ Panel
Register Presets
Important
• Reconfigure the presets if you change the [Camera] > [Camera Settings] > [Installation Conditions] > [Image Flip] (P. 78) settings on
the Setting Page.
• Reconfigure the presets if you change [Video Settings] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] (P. 72) settings in the Setting Page.
• If you change the settings in [Camera Settings] > [Camera Control] > [Image Stabilizer] in the Setting Page (P. 75), the angle of view
when using the camera will not match the angle of view when you configured presets. If you change [Image Stabilizer] settings,
recheck the preset settings.
R11
R10
M641 M640 M741 M740
R11
R10
M641
M640
M741
M740
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
171
(1) [Preset Registration] Tab
Registers presets.
(2) [Auto Control Settings] Tab
Displays the Auto Control Settings panel (P. 177).
(3) [Tour Route Settings] Tab
Displays the Tour Route Settings screen (P. 179).
(4) Preset List Headers
The following items appear here. Click an item to sort the list.
[No.]
The number of the preset. If the position for the preset is outside the view restriction range, (warning icon) will
appear on the left.
[Preset Name]
Displays the registered preset name.
[PTZ Position Settings]
[Yes] appears if pan, tilt or zoom positions are registered in presets.
[Camera Settings]
[Yes] appears if camera settings (P. 174) are registered in presets, and [Yes (partially)] if only partial camera settings
are registered.
[Show in viewers]
Shows whether presets are set to be selectable in the Viewers.
[Enable] appears when using [Quick Registration] or for presets that were registered with [Show in viewers] selected in
the [Advanced Preset Settings] panel (P. 173).
(5) Preset List
Presets appear in a list. If you double-click a registered preset in the list, you can also check that preset in the video
display area.
(4)
(5)
(3)(2)
(6)
(7) (8) (9)
(1)
172
(6) [Delete]
Delete the selected preset. [Home] (home position] cannot be deleted.
(7) Items to Register Menu
Select the setting to register with [Quick Registration] (P. 172).
(8) [Quick Registration]
Registers the settings selected in [Items to Reg.] in presets (P. 173).
(9) [Advanced]
Displays the [Advanced Preset Settings] panel (P. 173).
Use [Quick Registration]
Note
You can also use the following panels to change the camera angle.
– Panorama Display Panel
– Digital PTZ Panel
Select [Home] to set the home position.
You can register the following information.
Current PTZ Positions
The current pan, tilt and zoom positions displayed in the video display area.
Current Camera Settings
Current settings for items in Control for Admin excluding the following items.
• [Pan/Tilt/Zoom]
• [Video Reception]
1
Use the Viewer to display the camera angle in the video display area that you want to register.
2
Configure the video with [Control for Admin] if necessary.
3
On the preset list, select the number of the preset to register, then select the items in [Items to Reg.] to register in
the preset.
R11
R10
M641
M640
M741
M740
R11 R10
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
173
• [External Device Output]
The items selected in [Items to Reg.] for the selected preset numbers will be registered.
Note
• The preset number will be appended to the preset name.
If you want to set your own preset name from the start, click the [Advanced] button instead of the [Quick Registration] button and
follow the steps below for registration.
• If you select a registered preset and click [Quick Registration], the preset settings will be exchanged with the current camera
angle and settings.
• Presets set with [Quick Registration] will be selectable in the Viewers.
Register with [Advanced Preset Settings] Panel
You can use the [Advanced Preset Settings] panel to arbitrarily name presets, load camera information to configure
advanced preset settings and perform other tasks.
The [Advanced Preset Settings] panel appears.
4
Click [Quick Registration]
R11
M641
M741
1
Select a preset for registering advanced settings from the preset list.
2
Click the [Advanced].
174
(1) [Preset Name]
Enter a preset name of 64 characters or less. Be sure to enter a name in [Preset Name].
(2) [Show in viewers]
Select this to allow the Viewers to use the preset.
(3) [Pan/Tilt/Zoom]
You can set the pan, tilt and zoom positions by entering values.
The pan, tilt, zoom positions appear.
Note
• This check box cannot be cleared for [Home] (home position). Be sure to set this.
• (warning icon) will appear to the left of the value if you enter settings that fall outside the setting range.
(4) Camera Settings
Select the items in Control for Admin to apply to the preset. For details on each item, please refer to “Use
Control for Admin” (P. 158).
3
Set each item.
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(6)
(5)
(8)
(7)
R11
R10
M641
M640
M741
M740
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
175
Note
If one of [Smart Shade Control], [Haze compensation], [Exposure], or [Infrared] (VB-M741LE) is selected, all four will be selected
automatically.
However, the following combinations cannot be configured.
– [Exposure] cannot be set to [Manual] and [Smart Shade Control] cannot be set to [Auto] at the same time.
– [Smart Shade Control] cannot be used if [Haze Compensation] is set to [Auto] or a manual setting ([1] to [7]).
– [Haze Compensation] cannot be used if [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto] or a manual setting ([1] to [7]).
– When [Exposure] is set a value other than [Manual], [Infrared] cannot be set to [Level].
(5) [Get camera info]
The current video display area camera angle and camera settings will be loaded into the [Advanced Preset
Settings] panel.
Use this to apply changes in the camera angle and settings to the preset.
(6) [Preview]
Click this to have the settings in the [Advanced Preset Settings] panel applied to the video display area.
(7) [Restore settings]
If you previewed incorrect settings, etc., click this to revert to the settings registered in the camera.
(8) [Save settings]
Registers the settings in the [Advanced Preset Settings] panel.
The edited preset settings are saved to the camera.
If you configure preset settings, be sure to save them to the camera using [Save settings].
Context Menu
If you right-click on a preset in the preset list, the following menu appears.
[Preview]
The settings for the preset you right-clicked on are reflected in the video display area.
[Copy]
The settings for the preset you right-clicked on are copied.
[Paste]
Copied preset settings are applied to the preset you right-clicked on.
[Quick Registration]
Registers the settings selected in [Items to Reg.] in presets (P. 172).
[Delete]
The preset you right-clicked on is deleted. [Home] (home position] cannot be deleted.
Note
The available menu items change depending on the preset you right-click on.
Important
If [Manual] is selected in Focus Mode, manually adjust the focus while checking the actual video in the video display area. After
the focus has been adjusted, set the focus using [Get camera info]. Click [Save settings] to save the focus settings.
4
Click [Save settings].
M741
176
Change Multiple Presets Simultaneously
If you select multiple presets on the preset list and register settings with [Quick Registration] or the [Advanced Preset
Settings] panel, all of the presets will be configured with the same settings.
Note
Home positions cannot be configured simultaneously.
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
177
Presets registered in advance can be executed at a specified time or when events trigger the switching of Day/Night Mode.
Preset camera settings are also applied.
Configure [Auto Control Settings]
Select the [Switch Day/Night] or [Timer] preset in the [Auto Control Settings] tab, and click the [Save settings]. You can
register up to 4 timer preset auto controls.
(1) [Switch Day/Night]
Select each registered preset to be executed when switching to Day Mode or Night Mode using auto control.
(2) [Timer 1] to [Timer 4]
To use a preset at a specified time, set the time in 24-hour format and select the preset.
Automatically Move to a Preset Position at a Specified Time
(Auto Control Settings)
Important
If both [Switch Day/Night] and [Day/Night] > [Day/Night Focus Settings] > [Focus control when switching Day/Night Mode] (P. 165) have
been set, [Focus control when switching Day/Night Mode] will be given priority.
Important
• You cannot specify the same time multiple times in [Timer 1] to [Timer 4].
• If the [Timer] set here, and the [Timer] in in the Setting Page are set on the same time, the timer in the Setting Page will have priority.
Example)
– [Event] >[Timer] > [Start Time] is set to [2:00] in the Setting Page, select [preset2] as the [Start Time preset]
– [Timer] > [Time] is set to [2:00] in the [Auto Control Settings] tab, and Preset is set to [preset1].
Result: Preset 2 will run at 2:00.
(4)
(3)
(1)
(2)
178
(3) [Restore settings]
Revert to the auto control settings registered in the camera.
(4) [Save settings]
Register the settings for [Auto Control Settings].
Note
Auto control settings will not be executed while you have camera control privileges.
Important
[Restore settings] is shared with the [Tour Route Settings] tab. Since clicking this affects both tabs, also take care when restoring tour
route settings.
Important
[Save settings] is shared with the [Tour Route Settings] tab. Since clicking this affects both tabs, also take care when saving tour route
settings.
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
179
You can have the camera automatically tour multiple registered presets to allow monitoring.
Note
Preset tour is not performed while the camera is being controlled, such as with the Admin Viewer or the Admin Tools.
Preset tour is not performed when control privileges are obtained by RM-Lite.
[Tour Route Settings] Tab
Since the number of tour routes you can register, the numbers of preset that can be toured per route and the tour conditions
vary depending on the camera model, screen configurations differ as follows.
Configure the Preset Tour Route
Important
• Since use of preset tour could lead to overuse of the camera, possibly resulting in camera malfunction, it should only be used when
necessary. The amount of camera move in unit time can be reduced by increasing the duration the camera pauses at each point along
the tour.
• Intelligent Function cannot be used while using preset tour.
R11
R10
R11 R10
(4)
(1) (2)
(3)
(5) (6)
180
(1) [Route List]
This is the preset tour route list. It displays the configured tour conditions. You can configure five tour routes.
(2) Tour Condition Settings
Configure the tour route name and conditions for touring (P. 181).
(3) Select Preset List
Registered presets in the [Preset Setting] tab appear in this list if [PTZ Position Settings] is [Yes].
Select the preset you want to add to the tour route from this list.
Note
If the position for the preset is outside the view restriction range, (warning icon) will appear on the left.
(4) [Tour Presets List]
Presets that will be toured appear in this list. They will be toured in order from the top of the list.
You can configure settings, such as changing the preset order and the time to pause at a preset position.
(5) [Restore settings]
This discards the settings you are configuring and reverts to the settings registered in the camera.
(6) [Save settings]
The settings in the [Tour Route Settings] tab are saved to the camera.
Important
[Restore settings] is shared with the [Auto Control Settings] tab. Since clicking this affects both tabs, also take care when restoring auto
control settings.
Important
[Save settings] is shared with the [Auto Control Settings] tab. Since clicking this affects both tabs, also take care when saving auto
control settings.
M641 M640
M741
M740
(4)
(3) (5) (6)
(2)
R11
R10
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
181
Tour Route Settings
The number of tour routes you can register and the number of presets that can be toured per route are as follows.
• Maximum 5 routes, maximum 60 presets per route.
• Maximum 1 route, maximum 20 presets per route.
Note
If the effective conditions or active times of the registered tour routes conflict, the routes listed higher in the [Route List] take precedence.
(1) [Effective Conditions]
Select the conditions to preform a preset tour.
[Not used]
Preset tour is not performed.
[For Viewers]
Preset tour is performed when a Viewer is connected to the camera.
[Always]
Preset tour is always performed.
Note
When [Not used] is selected, the subsequent preset tour route settings cannot be configured.
(2) [Route Name]
Enter the tour route name of 64 characters or less.
(3) Active Time Settings
Select [Specify Active Time] to configure a preset tour at a predetermined time, and enter the start time and
end time for the preset tour.
(4) [Reverse route]
If you select this, the preset tour order in [Tour Presets List] will be reversed.
You can select multiple presets.
R11
R10
M641
M640 M741 M740
R11 R10
R11
R10
1
Select the tour route to configure from [Route List].
2
Settings for Tour Route Names and Usage
3
Select a preset to tour from the Select Preset list.
R11 R10
(2)
(3)
(1)
(4)
M641 M640 M741
M740
(1) (3)
R11
R10
R11
R10
182
The preset is added to the [Tour Presets List].
You can add a maximum of 60 presets.
You can add a maximum of 20 presets.
Select a preset in [Tour Presets List] and click the [Up] or [Down] to change its position in the list.
If you select a preset in [Tour Presets List] and then click [Delete], the preset will be deleted.
Note
If a preset has already been added to [Tour Presets List] and is selected when another preset is added from the [Select Preset] list,
the added preset will appear below the selected preset.
Select the preset to configure in [Tour Presets List] and click [Tour Operation Settings].
The [Tour Operation Settings] panel appears.
4
Click .
5
Configure the preset speed and pause duration.
R11
R10
M641
M640
M741
M740
R11 R10
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
M641 M640 M741
M740
(3)
(4)
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
183
(1) [Speed (PT)]
Select the camera pan/tilt speed for moving to the next preset.
(2) [Speed (Z)]
Select the camera zoom speed for moving to the next preset.
(3) [Pause (sec)]
Set the time the camera pauses at the preset position.
(4) [Preset Registration]
Register the [Tour Operation Settings] as the tour operations of the selected preset.
Note
If you want to view video during moves between presets, select a slow to medium speed. If you only want to switch quickly to view
video at the preset positions, select a fast speed.
Click [Save settings] after configuring the route. The setting will be saved to the camera.
Context Menu
[Route List] Context Menu
If you right-click on a tour route in [Route List], the following menu appears.
[Copy]
The settings for the tour route you right-clicked on are copied.
[Paste]
Copied tour route settings are applied to the tour route you right-clicked on.
[Clear]
The tour route you right-clicked on is returned to its initial state. It is not saved to the camera.
Preset selection list menu
If you right-click on a preset name in the [Select Preset] or [Select Tour Route Preset] list, the following menu
appears.
[Preview]
The preset you right-clicked can be verified in the video display area.
6
Click [Save settings].
Important
If you do not save the settings and click [Restore settings] in the [Auto Control Settings] tab, the settings in the [Tour Route
Settings] tab will also revert.
R11
R10
R11
R10
R11 R10
R11
R10
184
You can use the Event Display panel in the Admin Viewer to check the status for external device inputs, Intelligent Function
detection, and the triggering of linked events.
Confirm Status With the Event Display Panel
Click the [Event Display] button (P. 142) to display the panel.
(1) [External Device Input]
When a contact input signal is received from an external device, input will be activated and indicated with an icon.
Example:
Input 1: Input inactive
Input 2: Input active
(2) [Intelligent Function (Image Detection)]
The status of video detection (P. 210) by the Intelligent Function is displayed for each detection setting number.
When the detection settings configured in Intelligent Function (Moving Object Detection, Abandoned Object Detection,
Removed Object Detection, Camera Tampering Detection, Passing Detection, or Intrusion Detection) are triggered,
the corresponding icon will turn green.
If names are entered in [Detection Setting Name] in Intelligent Function Setting Tools (P. 219), [Setting 1] to [Setting
15] will be displayed with the corresponding names.
Example:
Setting 1: Image Detection status ON
Other settings: Image Detection status OFF
Note
The icon indicating the detection status will be displayed for a maximum of five minutes (except for Moving Object Detection).
Check the Event Detection Status With Admin Viewer
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(3)
R11
M641 M741
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
185
(3) [Intelligent Function (Auto Tracking)]
The detection status of Auto Tracking (P. 230) by the Intelligent Function is displayed. If detection is triggered, the icon
will turn green.
Example:
Auto Tracking status ON
(4) [Intelligent Function (Audio Detection)]
Displays the status of [Volume Detection] or [Scream Detection] set in [Event] > [Audio Detection] (P. 107) in the
Setting Page. If detection is triggered, the icon will turn green.
Example:
Volume: Volume Detection status ON
Scream: Scream Detection status OFF
(5) [Linked Events]
Displays the status of linked events for Intelligent Function set with [Event] > [Linked Events] (P. 113) in the Setting
Page. If a linked event is triggered, the icon will turn green.
Example:
Setting 2: Linked Event status ON
Other settings: Linked Event status OFF
R11 R10
R11
M641
M741
R11
M641
M741
186
You can capture snapshots or manually record video to a memory card inserted in the camera as you view video in the
video display area.
Capture a Snapshot
Capture and save a snapshot from the video in the video display area.
The Snapshot panel will open showing a snapshot from the moment you clicked.
If you click the [Snapshot] button again, the image displayed in the Snapshot panel will be updated.
Note
• The snapshot is saved as a JPEG file.
• The saved snapshots are the same size as the video capture size.
Record Video to a Memory Card Manually
Manually record video being displayed in the video display area to a memory card inserted in the camera.
Note
• You can manually record video if the following conditions have been met.
– The memory card inserted in the camera is mounted (P. 142).
– Set [Operation Settings] to [Save Logs and Videos] in [Video Record] > [Memory Card] > [Memory Card Operations] (P. 101) in the
Setting Page.
• The format and size of the video recorded to a memory card depends on the settings configured on the Setting Page.
– Video format: [Memory Card] > [Memory Card Operations] > [Video Format] (P. 130)
– Video size: JPEG [Basic Settings] > [Video Settings] > [JPEG] > [Video Size: Upload / Memory card]
H.264 [Basic Settings] > [Video Settings] > [H.264(1)] > [Video Size]
Recording Videos Manually
Record Snapshots/Video With Admin Viewer
1
Click [Snapshot] button at the moment you want to capture a snapshot.
2
To save the snapshot, right-click on the Snapshot panel.
3
Click [Save Picture As] in the menu that appears.
4
Enter the desired file name and save the snapshot.
1
If you have not obtained camera control privileges, click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button to
obtain the privileges.
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
187
The display of the [Memory Card Recording] button will change during video recording.
Confirming Recorded Video
Use the Recorded Video Utility (P. 240) to confirm and playback the video manually recorded to a memory card.
Click the [Recorded Video Utility] button to launch the Recorded Video Utility.
2
Click the [Memory Card Recording] button.
Not recording
Recording
3
To stop video recording, click the [Memory Card Recording] button again.
Important
• Manually recorded video to the memory card will automatically be terminated after 300 seconds of recording.
• When recording manually, do not change the settings in the [Setting Page]. Doing so may result in the termination of the manual
recording.
188
For details on each part of the VB Viewer, please refer to “Admin Viewer/VB Viewer Screen” > “VB Viewer” (P. 141).
Launch VB Viewer and Differences with Admin Viewer
Launch VB Viewer
Launch the camera top page and click [VB Viewer] to launch the VB Viewer (P. 41).
Differences with the Admin Viewer
The following Admin Viewer functions and buttons are not available in the VB Viewer.
• H.264 video display
• Memory card mount status icon
• [Memory Card Recording] button
• [Recorded Video Utility] button
• [Event Display] button
• [Control for Admin] button
• [Audio Transmission] button
VB Viewer Operation Range
If you have set view restrictions with the View Restriction Setting Tool (P. 206), the VB Viewer can only be used within
the view restrictions.
Camera Control Privilege Status Indicator
Depending on the camera control privilege status, the camera control privilege indicator and [Obtain/Release
Camera Control Privileges] button appearance changes as follows.
Use VB Viewer
R11
M641
M741
Control Privilege Display
[Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] Button
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer
5
189
Context Menu in Full Screen Mode
The following menus appear when you right-click in full screen mode in the VB Viewer.
For details on each item, please refer to P. 145.
Appeara
nce
Control Privilege Status Explanation
Control privileges not
obtained
Camera control privilege indicator is grayed out.
The [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button is animated.
Waiting to obtain control
privileges
If you click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button while
privileges are not assigned and are put in the queue for privileges, the
camera control privilege indicator will display the remaining time.
Control privileges
obtained
Camera control privilege indicator appears in blue.
The center of the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] button is blue.
Control privileges
obtained
(remaining control time)
After obtaining control privileges, the amount of time for maintaining control
privilege priority is displayed in the control privilege indicator.
R11 R10
M641 M640 M741 M740
190
Chapter
Admin Tools
Use the Admin Tools included on the camera to configure the various monitoring methods used by the
camera.
There are also tools for checking camera operation and managing recorded video.
192
The Admin Tools consists of tools for configuring settings, such as for camera use, a viewer for checking the camera
operation status logs and a utility for managing recorded video.
You can launch each tool from the [Admin Tools] top page (P. 193).
Overview of Each Tool in the Admin Tools
Privacy Mask Setting Tool (P. 196)
This tool masks areas you do not what to show in the camera video, such as areas where you want to maintain privacy. Up
to eight areas can be masked, allowing thorough protection of privacy.
Panorama Creation Tool (P. 201)
This tool captures the entire area that can be captured by the camera to create a panorama image. The panorama image
appears in the panorama display panel of the Admin Viewer/VB Viewer and in the setting screen of the View Restriction
Setting Tool. It also allows you to see at a glance which part of the entire area the Viewer is displaying video from or has
made settings in.
View Restriction Setting Tool (P. 206)
This tool limits the range that can be captured by the camera. You can visually configure settings with the preview frame on
the panorama screen using the mouse.
Intelligent Function Setting Tool (P. 210)
This tool configures settings for writing to a log, recording video, or sending e-mail notifications when a part of the video
changes, such as when a subject moves. You can configure detection areas or conditions while checking the video.
Log Viewer (P. 236)
This Viewer allows browsing the camera operation status logs recorded in the camera. You can also download the log from
the camera and save the file.
Recorded Video Utility (P. 240)
This is a utility for browsing and managing video recorded on memory cards inserted in the camera. You can display a list
of recorded video, and play back, delete and download video.
Admin Tools Overview
R11
R10
R11
R10
Admin Tools
6
193
This explains the [Admin Tools] top page and how to launch the Admin Tools.
Launch Admin Tools
Launch the Admin Tools by accessing the Admin Tools top page from the camera top page.
Note
• The Privacy Mask Setting Tool, Panorama Creation Tool, View Restriction Setting Tool and Intelligent Function Setting Tool cannot be
launched simultaneously.
• To use the Admin Tools in environments without a proxy server, select [Internet options] > [Connections] tab > [LAN settings] and clear
the [Automatically detect settings] check box in Internet Explorer.
• When the Preset Setting panel is opened with the Admin Viewer, all tool buttons will be disabled except for the Recorded Video Utility
and Log Viewer.
A user authentication window appears.
The [Admin Tools] top page will appear.
The tool will launch.
Note
• The first time you launch any of the tools in the Admin Tools, it may take about 5 to 10 seconds for the software to download to the
computer. When accessing via SSL encrypted communication, download time will take longer (about 20 to 30 seconds).
• Admin Tools can also be launched from the Camera Management Tool. For details, please refer to the Camera Management Tool
user manual.
Access Admin Tools
Important
The Admin Tools Certificate must be installed on the computer to launch the Admin Tools (P. 22).
1
Launch the camera top page and click [Admin Tools] (P. 41).
2
Enter a user name and password (P. 42) and click [OK].
3
Click the tool you would like to launch.
194
Launch Other Top Pages
You can launch the top pages for the Admin Viewer, Setting Page and camera by clicking the buttons in the upper
right of the [Admin Tools] top page.
Admin Tools Operations Common to All Tools
The way you operate the viewer area for the Privacy Mask Setting Tool, View Restriction Setting Tool and Intelligent Function
Setting Tool is the same.
Viewer Area
(1) Video Display Area
This displays the video currently being captured by the camera. You can set the area using the mouse in the
video display area.
Note
When [1280x720/640x360/320x180] is set for the 16:9 aspect ratio in [Basic Settings] > [Video Settings] > [All Videos] > [Video Size
Set], black bars will appear on the top and bottom of the video display area.
(2) [Switch Mouse Operation] Button
When you click this button, mouse operations for icons and in the video display area change as follows.
(3) [Switch Screen Size] Button
Each time you click this button, the screen size of the video display area switches between 320 x 240 and 640 x
480.
(4) [BLC] (Back Light Compensation) Button
Click this button to turn backlight compensation on or off (P. 155).
(5) [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges] Button
Click this to obtain and release the camera control privileges (P. 147).
:
You can specify areas on the displayed video. While in this mode, the camera angle will not change.
:
You can pan and tilt the camera.
(2) (3)(1)
(4)
(5)
(6)
R11
R10
Admin Tools
6
195
(6) [Control for Admin] Button
Displays the Control for Admin panel.
Pan/Tilt/Zoom Operations
Pan, tilt, and zoom operations are the same as in the Admin Viewer (P. 147).
Note
• Area Zoom and Drag to Move (P. 149) cannot be used with the video display area of the Admin Tools.
• Auto Flip (P. 76) is disabled in the video display area in Admin Tools.
Control for Admin
Privacy Mask Setting Tool, View Restriction Setting Tool and Intelligent Function Setting Tool can use certain items in
Control for Admin.
Control for Admin Operations
Click the [Control for Admin] button (P. 195) in the viewer area to display the Control for Admin panel.
The Control for Admin panel operates in the same way as Control for Admin of the Admin Viewer (P. 158).
You can configure the following items in Control for Admin panel of the Admin Tools.
R11
R10
[Smart Shade Control]
You can configure Smart Shade Control settings (P. 159).
[Haze Compensation]
You can adjust the video if the subject is obscured by haze (P. 160).
[Focus]
You can adjust focus (P. 161).
[Exposure]
You can adjust exposure (P. 162).
Note
If you select [Lock camera position] (P. 216) or [Specify the initial camera
position], the Intelligent Function Setting Tool (P. 230), you will not be able to
use the tool’s Control for Admin items.
196
This tool masks specified areas of the camera video. You can check the camera video and set up to 8 privacy masks.
When the camera is panned, tilted, or zoomed, the privacy mask areas follow the camera video.
Register Privacy Masks
Use the mouse to position and size the privacy mask areas, then save the settings to the camera.
Drag the preview frame displayed in the video display area to the position you want to mask.
Change the size of the preview frame by dragging the handles (■) positioned on its four sides.
Privacy Mask Setting Tool
Important
• Privacy masks are applied to all video transmitted from the camera (live video, uploaded video, recorded video and video recorded to
a memory card).
• Privacy masks are not available in the following situations.
– While the camera is launched after being turned on.
– For camera video in the Camera Angle Setting Tool
– While a panorama image is being created.
• Intelligent Function detection also works in the privacy mask areas. Subject movement may be visible.
M641
M640
M741
M740
R11
R10
Settings Screen for the Privacy Mask Setting Tool
1
If you have not yet obtained the camera control privileges, click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges]
button and obtain the control privileges (P. 147).
2
Set the size and position for the privacy mask in the video display area.
Admin Tools
6
197
The privacy mask area is saved to the camera.
Saved privacy mask areas are shown in the video display area and the privacy mask registration area.
Important
• Set the privacy mask area to a slightly larger size than the area you want to hide.
• You can only set privacy masks in the optical zoom range. Privacy masks cannot be set in the digital zoom range (P. 148).
3
Select the color for the privacy mask area with [Color].
4
Click [Quick add].
Preview Frame
R11 R10
198
You can save up to 8 privacy masks.
Change/Delete a Privacy Mask
How to Select a Privacy Mask
There are two ways to select a privacy mask area.
• Click the privacy mask area you want to change in the privacy mask registration area.
• Keep clicking [Next] until you select the privacy mask area you want.
5
To add privacy mask areas, repeat steps 2 to 5.
Important
• Check privacy mask settings again if you change the [Basic Settings] > [Video Settings] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set]
settings on the Setting Page.
• You will need to set the position of the privacy mask again if you change the [Image Flip] setting in [Camera] > [Camera
Settings] > [Installation Conditions] on the setting page.
• If you reconfigure privacy mask settings after you changed the [Camera] > [Camera Settings] > [Camera Control] > [Image
Stabilizer] on the setting page, reconfigure all privacy mask positions and sizes.
• After registering a privacy mask, pan, tilt and zoom the camera to confirm the areas you want to mask do not become visible
when the camera direction is altered.
• Privacy masks may deviate slightly from the specified position depending on the zoom position.
• If you change the privacy mask settings after saving a panorama image using the Panorama Creation Tool, you must use the
Panorama Creation Tool to recreate the panorama image.
Privacy mask
registration area
Privacy Mask Areas
R11
R10
Privacy Mask Areas
Admin Tools
6
199
Privacy Mask Registration Area
This shows the positions of privacy mask areas in the entire area that can be captured by the camera.
(1) Entire Area That Camera Can Capture
This shows the area that can physically be captured.
Even if a panoramic image is registered on the camera, it will not be displayed here.
(2) View Restriction Area
Appears if view restrictions have been configured with the View Restriction Setting Tool (P. 206).
(3) Privacy Mask Areas
Privacy masks selected in [Detailed Settings] [Enable Privacy Mask] (P. 200) are displayed filled with color.
Privacy masks not selected are displayed with a crossed out frame.
(4) Maximum Wide-Angle Area
This is the visible area when the camera is at maximum wide-angle. This is only displayed when a privacy mask
area is being dragged.
Change Mask Position and Size
You can use the mouse to move or resize the preview frame, or change values in [Detailed Settings] (P. 200).
Note
To discard changes and restore settings saved to the camera, click [Restore settings].
The changed privacy mask area is saved to the camera.
Note
Select a disabled privacy mask and click [Quick change] to enable it.
R11
R10
M641
M640
M741
M740
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(3)
R11 R10
R11
R10
R11
R10
1
Select the privacy mask area you want to change.
2
Change the position and size of the privacy mask area.
3
Click [Quick change] or [Save settings].
200
Enter Values for Detailed Position and Size Settings
You can configure detailed position and size settings for the camera angle and privacy mask areas by entering
values.
If you select a privacy mask and click [Detailed Settings], the fields for entering values will appear.
(1) [Pan], [Tilt], [Zoom]
The settings for pan, tilt and zoom appear here if you saved privacy masks using [Quick add] or clicked [Get
camera position]. You can also directly enter the setting values.
(2) [Get camera position]
Click this to load the current camera pan, tilt, and zoom settings and display them in (1).
(3) [Privacy Mask Position and Size]
The position and size settings for the selected privacy mask appear here. You can also directly enter the setting
values.
(4) [Preview settings]
Click this to preview the settings entered in (1) and (3) in the video display area and privacy mask registration
area. The preview results are not saved to the camera.
Enable/disable a Privacy Mask
Select the check box to enable the settings of a selected privacy mask area.
Clear the check box to temporarily disable a privacy mask area without deleting it. The disabled privacy mask area
will be displayed with a crossed out frame.
Delete a Privacy Mask
The selected privacy mask area is deleted from the camera.
R11
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
R10
R11
R10
R11
R10
R11
R10
1
Select the privacy mask area you want to delete.
2
Click [Delete].
Admin Tools
6
201
This tool captures the entire area that can be captured by the camera to create a panorama image.
The panorama image appears in the panorama display panel (P. 151) of the Admin Viewer/VB Viewer and in the setting
screen of the View Restriction Setting Tool (P. 206).
Create a Panorama Image
Once you have created and saved a panorama image to the camera, it can be used by the tools.
Panorama Creation Tool
Important
If the privacy mask settings were changed using the Privacy Mask Setting Tool, it is recommended that you recreate the panorama image
to reflect the new privacy mask settings in the panorama image.
R11
R10
VB Viewer Panorama Display
Panel
Panorama Creation Tool Settings Screen
202
These settings will be applied at the panorama image capture start time and will revert back to their previous
settings once capture is completed.
(1) [Exposure Lock]
The exposure for the selected position will be automatically adjusted and locked during capture.
(2) [White Balance Lock]
The white balance for the selected position will be automatically adjusted and locked during capture.
(3) [Focus Lock]
The focus for the selected position will be automatically adjusted and locked for the entire scene during
capture.
Capture starts and the panorama image is created.
To stop capture while underway, click [Cancel].
Note
• While a panorama image is being captured, the Image Stabilizer is temporarily disabled.
• The following users will be disconnected while creating a panorama image.
– All users except for administrators
– Users not connected via RTP
• When a small value is entered for [Maximum Frame Rate: Video Transmission] (P. 73) in [Video Settings] > [JPEG] in the Setting
Page, panorama capture is slowed down.
Recapture a part of the image:
When you position the mouse pointer over the panorama image, a white grid appears.
If you right-click on a part of the image and select [Recapture] from the menu that appears, only that part of the
image will be recaptured.
1
If necessary, configure the [Exposure Lock], [White Balance Lock] and [Focus Lock] settings used when capturing
the panorama image.
2
Click [Start Panorama Creation].
3
Recapture the image if necessary.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Admin Tools
6
203
Recapture an entire panorama image:
Click [Start Panorama Creation] again.
The created panorama image will not appear in other tools yet.
A confirmation message will appear.
The panorama image is saved to the camera and appears in other tools.
4
Click [Finish Panorama Creation].
5
Click [Save to camera].
6
Click [OK].
204
Delete a Panorama Image from the Camera
Delete a panorama image saved in the camera.
The currently displayed panorama image is deleted.
A confirmation message will appear.
The panorama image saved in the camera is deleted.
Save/Load Panorama Image File
You can save recorded panorama images as image files and open image files as panorama images.
Only JPEG images can be used.
Save an Image File
1
Click [Clear].
2
Click [Save to camera].
3
Click [OK].
1
Click [Save to file].
2
Select the folder you want to save the image file in and enter the file name in the displayed dialog box.
Admin Tools
6
205
Load an Image File
3
Click [Save].
1
Click [Load from file].
2
Select the image file you want to use from the dialog box that appears.
3
Click [Open].
206
This tool limits the range that can be captured by the camera.
You can use this, for example, to limit zoom or the field of view to a certain range when publishing live video.
Scope of View Restriction Settings
Restrictions set by the View Restriction Setting Tool are applied in the following cases.
• When the Admin Viewer is accessed with authorized user privileges.
• When the VB Viewer is accessed.
• When accessed via the Intelligent Function Setting Tool.
• When accessed via RM-Lite.
• For presets or functions that move to preset positions.
Note
Even when view restrictions are set, an area outside the view restriction may still appear momentarily when the camera is controlled
near the boundary of the view restriction.
Configure View Restrictions
There are two ways to configure view restriction settings.
• Use the panorama screen view restriction preview frame.
• Use the viewer area and load the position information from the camera.
View Restriction Setting Tool
R11
R10
View restriction
Recording outside the view restriction
is not possible.
View Restriction Setting Tool Settings Screen
Panorama screen
Viewer Area
Admin Tools
6
207
Configure Settings With the Panorama Screen Preview Frame
Note
To delete view restriction settings, clear the [Apply the view restriction] check box and click [Save settings].
(1) Pan/Tilt Preview Frame (Red Frame)
Displays the vertical and horizontal range the camera can move.
(2) Wide-Angle Preview Frame (Green Frame)
Indicates the maximum wide-angle view possible within the pan/tilt preview frame. You cannot change the
aspect ratio.
(3) Telephoto Preview Frame (Yellow Frame)
Indicates the maximum telephoto view possible within the wide-angle preview frame. You cannot change the
aspect ratio.
Note
If you resize the preview frames, the view restriction setting values will be updated in the value entry fields.
The settings are saved to the camera.
Note
The panorama screen may be slightly different from the actual image. After you have configured view restrictions, be sure to use the
VB Viewer to confirm they have been reflected correctly. View restrictions are not applied to the video display area of this tool nor in
the Admin Viewer.
Important
• If you have changed how the camera is installed, recapture the panorama image and register it again.
• Check view restriction settings again if you change the [Basic Settings] > [Video Settings] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set]
settings on the Setting Page.
• When [Camera] > [Camera Settings] > [Camera Control] > [Digital Zoom] or [Image Stabilizer] are changed in the setting
page, check restriction settings again.
1
Select [Apply the view restriction].
2
Drag or resize the 3 types of preview frames displayed on the panorama screen to configure the view restrictions.
3
Click [Save settings].
(1)
(2)
(3)
208
Load Position Information from Video Display Area Camera Angle to
Configure Settings
You can set the preview frame displayed on the panorama screen by loading position information from the actual
video appearing in the video display area.
You can also enter values directly.
Note
If you have selected [Apply the view restriction] and leave any of the setting values empty, the maximum view range will be set.
The imported view restriction is reflected in the value input box.
For more detailed settings, you can directly input values into value input boxes.
You can confirm the loaded setting values were updated in the panorama screen.
The settings are saved to the camera.
Note
• The controllable range and range that can be captured are as follows.
• The pan and tilt ranges vary depending on the zoom ratio (view angle).
1
Select [Apply the view restriction].
2
Use the viewer area to adjust the camera angle, set the upper, lower, left and right limits, and the telephoto and
wide-angle views, clicking [Get value] for each position set.
3
Click the [Display in panorama screen] button.
4
Click [Save settings].
Maximum vertical capture range
Controllable tilt range
Controllable pan range
Maximum horizontal capture range
Maximum wide-angle viewing angle
Admin Tools
6
209
• If the view restriction will be exceeded as a result of zooming toward wide-angle, the camera will first pan and tilt to a position where the
maximum wide-angle zoom will be within the viewing restriction area. Wide-angle zoom control will then be enabled within the view
restriction area.
• Reducing the view restriction may also reduce the zoom range.
Auto Flip and View Restriction Settings
Under the following conditions, when the View Restriction Setting Tool is launched or [Restore settings] is clicked, a
message appears indicating that the view restriction setting values are disabled and (warning icon) appears to
the left of the [View Restriction Settings] setting value input box.
Conditions
• [Apply the view restriction] is selected.
• [Camera] > [Camera Settings] > [Camera Control] > [Auto Flip] is set to [Enable] in the Setting Page (P. 76).
• When [Camera] > [Camera Settings] > [Installation Conditions] > [Image Flip] is set to [Disable] in the Setting
Page (P. 78): [Lower Limit], [Left Limit], or [Right Limit] has been entered for [View Restriction Settings].
• When [Camera] > [Camera Settings] > [Installation Conditions] > [Image Flip] is set to [Enable] in the Setting Page
(P. 78): [Lower Limit], [Left Limit], or [Right Limit] has been entered for [View Restriction Settings].
[Save settings] is clicked when [View Restriction Settings] is enabled.
Under the above conditions, a message also appears indicating that Auto Flip is disabled when [Save settings] is
clicked.
When you click [OK] in the message, Auto Flip is disabled and the [View Restriction Settings] are saved.
Setting view restrictions
automatically restricts
the camera operating
angle.
At wide-angle, the camera operating
angle would allow capture outside
the view restrictions if the angle
remained the same. Therefore, it is
narrowed automatically.
Restricted view angle
Camera operating angle
Captured video range
Camera
Zoom
out
Captured video
Restricted view angle
Zoom
out
First, the center of the
maximum wide-angle
zoom is panned and
tilted.
After panning and
tilting, wide-angle
zoom control is
enabled within the
view restriction.
210
Intelligent Function
The Intelligent Function records video, sends e-mail notifications, plays audio and starts other operations when it detects
changes in the video due to subject movement.
The Intelligent Function has the following modes.
• Video Detection
• Auto Tracking
• Audio Detection
Intelligent Function Setting Tool Overview
R11 R10
R11
M641
M741
Notes on Use of This Camera
The Intelligent Function is not suitable for applications where high reliability is required. If constant and maximum reliability
is required for surveillance it is not recommended that you use this function. Canon shall assume no liability for any
accident, loss or other undesirable outcomes resulting from Intelligent Function operations.
Admin Viewer
RM Viewer
Camera
E-mail Notification
Network
Video Recording on
Storage Server
Upload to FTP
Server/HTTP
Server
Audio Detection
Moving Object Detection
Removed Object
Detection
Abandoned Object
Detection
Passing
Detection
Camera Tampering Detection
Intrusion Detection Auto Tracking
Admin Tools
6
211
Video Detection
Detects changes to video in a specified area. There are 6 types of detection to suit your needs.
Moving Object Detection
Detect moving objects. This function can be used to detect visitors or suspicious individuals.
Moving object detection is triggered while moving objects are inside the detection area.
Abandoned Object Detection
Detect objects that are carried in and abandoned for a certain duration. This function can be used to detect
suspicious objects that have been left behind. Abandoned object detection is triggered when an object is left in the
detection area for a specified duration.
Removed Object Detection
Detect objects that have been removed. This can be used to detect actions such as the taking away of valuables.
Removed object detection is triggered when an object is removed from the detection area for a specified duration.
Background Video Generated
Moving object enters/leaves area.
Change in Designated Area Analysis Moving Object Detected
Detection begins when a
moving object enters the
designated area.
Detected
Background Video Generated
Object abandoned.
Change in Designated Area Analysis Abandoned Object Detected
The object is abandoned
and detection begins after
specified duration.
Detected
Background Video Generated
Removing an object
Change in Designated Area Analysis Object Removal Detected
The picture (object) is
removed and detection
begins after a specified
duration.
Detected
212
Camera Tampering Detection
Detect when capture is being disrupted. This can be used to detect when the camera orientation is changed or the
video display is obscured with spray, etc. Camera tampering detection is triggered when an area exceeding a
specified ratio of change is continuously altered.
Passing Detection
Detect when a person or moving object crosses a specified line.
This determines that an object is passing when the decision point of the object detection frame crosses a detection
line.
Background Video
Generated
Tampering
Video Changes Analysis Camera Tampering
Detected
Detection begins when the ratio
of change in a video exceeds a
specified amount.
Detected
Background Video
Generated
Passing
Video Changes
Analysis
Passing Detected
Detection begins when the
decision point crosses the
specified detection line.
Detected
Decision Point
Detection
Frame
Admin Tools
6
213
Intrusion Detection
Detect when a person or moving object crosses a specified area. This can be used to detect actions such as when
someone climbs over a barrier and enters a restricted area in a museum, etc. This determines that an object is entering
when the decision point of the object detection frame enters the detection area and the specified duration has elapsed.
Auto Tracking
The camera automatically tracks an object when it is detected moving in a detection area. This allows monitoring
movement, such as of suspicious persons.
Audio Detection
Detects audio input to the camera. There are 2 types of detection.
These are set with [Event] > [Audio Detection] (P. 107) on the Setting Page, not with the Intelligent Function Setting
Tool.
[Volume Detection]: Detects when volume level exceeds or falls below a reference volume.
[Scream Detection]: Detects screams or cries from people.
Notes on Intelligent Function Settings and Operations
• When setting the Intelligent Function, do an actual detection/tracking test to confirm that detection will be performed
correctly.
• If a sudden change in lightness or darkness occurs within the entire screen, proper detection may not be possible for up
to five minutes. When tracking, the effect will be visible as soon as there is change in the scene.
• When the image is zoomed in (telephoto), detection/tracking may not work as expected.
• Detection/tracking will not be performed while the Intelligent Function is restarting.
Background Video
Generated
Intrusion
Video Changes Analysis Intrusion
Detected
Detection begins when the
decision point enters the
detection area.
Detected
Decision
Point
Detection
Frame
R11
R10
Background Video
Generated
Video Changes Analysis Auto Tracking
Tracking
R11
M641
M741
214
• If the camera is operated while configuring or using the Intelligent Function, [Restarting intelligent function. Please wait.]
is shown and the Intelligent Function will restart.
• If the display switches between Day mode and Night mode, [Restarting intelligent function. Please wait.] is shown and
intelligent function will restart.
• If [Basic Settings] > [Video Settings] > [All Videos] > [Video Size Set] settings on the Setting Page are changed, be sure
to change the preset position settings (only for the VB-R11VE/VB-R11/VB-R10VE) and Intelligent Function settings, and
check operations. The Intelligent Function may not operate, depending on the settings.
• Set the Intelligent Function again if the angle of view is changed through camera operation, or the camera position of a
preset or home position is changed.
• If [Status] in [Detection Setting List] is [Enabled] when the camera position is fixed, control privileges cannot be obtained
by VB Viewer or RM. Also, the preset tour will no longer run.
Difficult-to-Detect Subjects
The following subjects may not be detected/tracked, or may result in erroneous detection/tracking.
• Objects or areas where there is little contrast in color or brightness with the background may not be detected/
tracked.
• Small objects and changes on the screen may not be detected/tracked.
• Partial or entire changes in brightness on the screen may trigger detection/tracking.
• When there are multiple overlapping objects, there may be a change in detection. For example, objects passing
may either not be detected or the timing of detection may be incorrect.
• When there are large numbers of objects in the scene, objects may not be properly detected/tracked.
• Objects with little movement may not be tracked.
• Objects directly below the camera may take time to be tracked.
• Areas with bright reflections or selected areas that are very bright, can result in an object not probably being
tracked.
Pre-register Presets
It is strongly recommended that you register the camera angle as a preset in advance and lock the camera to that position
when using video detection. It is also recommended that the field of view that captures targeted objects at a larger ratio be
used.
For details on preset registration, please refer to “Register Presets” (P. 170).
Select the Intelligent Function Operation Mode
Video detection and auto tracking cannot be used simultaneously. When you launch the Intelligent Function Setting Tool,
you can select which one to use.
Note
The detection condition settings are retained even if you change operation modes.
R11
R10
R11
R10
R11
R10
1
Launch the Intelligent Function Setting Tool (P. 193).
2
Select [Video Detection] or [Auto Tracking] and click [OK].
Admin Tools
6
215
A confirmation screen appears.
[Video Detection]
When you click [Yes], the Intelligent Function Setting Tool launches with its [Lock camera position] selected. If
you click [No], select [Lock camera position] after video detection launches.
[Auto Tracking]
If you click [Yes], you will obtain camera control and can configure Auto Tracking settings. If you click [No],
obtain camera control after Auto Tracking launches and configure Auto Tracking settings.
When [Video Detection] is selected, please refer to “Intelligent Function Setting Tool - Video Detection -” (P. 216)
to configure video detection settings.
When [Auto Tracking] is selected, please refer to “Intelligent Function Setting Tool - Auto Tracking -” (P. 230) to
configure Auto Tracking settings.
Important
[Video Detection] and [Motion Detection] are exclusive of each other. Only the selected mode operates, the other is disabled.
The settings of the disabled operation mode, however, are retained (except the camera angle) and used if the mode is enabled
again later.
3
Set the Selected Operation Mode
216
In video detection, select the type to detect, and set the tracking area for video changes while checking images on the
camera. You should also set which operations (e-mail notification, record video, playing audio from the speaker connected
to the camera) should be carried out when changes are detected.
Steps for Configuring Video Detection
The following are the basic steps for configuring video detection. For details on settings for each type of detection, please
refer to “Configure Detection Criteria ([Detection Criteria] Tab)” (P. 219).
For details on how to adjust presets, please refer to “Register Presets” (P. 170).
Note
You can select presets that meet the following conditions.
Intelligent Function Setting Tool
- Video Detection -
R11
R10
M641
M640
M741
M740
1
Select [Lock camera position] in [Camera Position Settings], then select a preset.
R11
R10
Admin Tools
6
217
– Presets configured within the view restrictions.
– Presets with pan, tilt and zoom setting values (no empty entries) configured in the [Preset Registration] tab. (P. 171)
Note
You can register up to 15 detection settings.
The added detection setting will appear in the [Detection Setting List] and [Detect Criteria] tab.
To disable detection settings, clear this check box.
2
Click [Add] in [Detection Setting List].
3
Select [Detection Setting Number] (1 to 15) and [Detection Type] for the detection setting to be added.
4
Click [OK].
5
Select [Enable these detection settings].
218
Set criteria in the video display area or [Detection Criteria] tab (P. 219). The detection criteria differ according to
the detection type.
Set which operations to carry out for video detection in the [Event] tab (P. 227).
The settings are saved to the camera.
Note
To restore settings, click [Restore Settings] before saving. This discards the settings you have specified and restores the settings
saved in the camera.
6
Configure the detection criteria.
7
Configure event settings.
8
Click [Save settings].
9
To register multiple detection settings, repeat steps 2 to 8.
Admin Tools
6
219
You can check the detection status of the specified detection settings in video display area and the event display
panel (P. 234).
Configure Detection Criteria ([Detection Criteria] Tab)
Detection criteria is controlled and set in the video display area for each type of detection.
Settings Common to Each Detection Type
(1) [Detection Settings Name]
Enter a detection name of 64 characters or less. Be sure to enter a name in [Detection Settings Name].
(2) [Area Shape]
Configure whether the detection area is a rectangle or a free-shape polygon.
Note
You cannot select [Area Shape] for camera tampering detection.
Use [Rectangular]
Configure the detection area by moving, resizing or changing the shape of the rectangle that appears in the
video display area.
Drag the area to move it, and drag the vertices to resize it.
Use [Polygonal]
Click the video display area to place a vertex for the polygon at the clicked position.
Place the vertices in order, then either click the first vertex again or double-click the last vertex to set the polygon
detection area.
10
Check the detection result.
Important
It is recommended that you configure the detection criteria in conditions as close as possible to the actual conditions in which you will
use the camera.
(1)
(2)
(3)
220
Drag the area to move it, and drag the vertices to resize it.
You can specify polygonal areas with a maximum of 32 vertices.
Note
If you change the shape of a detection area you have already configured, the area is deleted and you switch to configuring a new
area.
[Clear]
The detection area configured with [Polygonal] is deleted.
(3) [Display Color]
Select the color for detection areas and detection lines.
How to Configure Moving Object Detection
Set the area you want to detect a moving object in as a detection area.
This determines how large the moving object must be in relation to the detection area you set in step 2 for motion
detection to be triggered.
When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator frame representing the object size is displayed for one
second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while specifying the setting.
1
Select [Rectangular] or [Polygonal].
2
Use the video display area to configure the area where you would like to detect moving objects (P. 219).
3
Configure the size of the object needed for triggering detection in [Object Size (%)].
Object Size Indicator
Detection Area
Admin Tools
6
221
Detection Status for Moving Object Detection
All moving objects detected are shown with contour lines.
If a moving object is smaller than [Object Size (%)], its contour lines are white.
If the moving object is larger than [Object Size (%)], its contour lines take on the same color as the detection area,
indicating that “detected” mode has been triggered.
Note
If an object is placed in or removed from the moving object detection area, “detected” mode will be triggered for Moving Object
Detection.
How to Configure Abandoned Object Detection
Set the area you want to detect a placed object in as a detection area.
This determines how large the abandoned object must be in relation to the detection area you set in step 2 for
abandoned object detection to be triggered.
When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator frame representing the object size is displayed for one
second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while specifying the setting.
Contour Lines of Detected Moving Object
1
Select [Rectangular] or [Polygonal].
2
Use the video display area to configure the area where you would like to detect abandoned objects (P. 219).
3
Configure the size of the object needed for triggering detection in [Object Size (%)].
4
Configure [Duration (Sec)] for the time required for an object to be detected as an abandoned object.
Object Size Indicator
Detection Area
222
Detection Status for Abandoned Object Detection
All moving objects detected are shown with contour lines.
If [Object Size (%)] and [Duration (Sec)] are not exceeded, contour lines are white.
If both [Object Size (%)] and [Duration (Sec)] are exceeded, the contour lines take on the same color as the detection
area, indicating that “detected” mode has been triggered.
How to Configure Removed Object Detection
Set an area around the target objects, for Removed Object Detection. If there are multiple objects for which you want
to enable detection, be sure to configure Removed Object Detection for each object.
Temporarily remove the target object for removed object detection from the video display area.
▼
Click [Restart intelligent function] (P. 235).
The background image is generated
▼
Return the target object to its original position.
▼
Click [Quick setting].
An outline of the object is drawn using a polygon with up to 32 vertices.
If there are multiple objects detected, the outline is drawn around the object occupying the largest area.
▼
Click [Restart intelligent function] again.
Contours of Moving Object Detected as Abandoned
1
Select [Rectangular] or [Polygonal].
2
Use the video display area to configure an area along the contours of the object you do not want removed (P. 219).
You can also click [Quick setting] and follow the steps below to configure the area.
Set detection area
Admin Tools
6
223
Detection Status for Removed Object Detection
All moving objects detected are shown with contour lines.
As long as [Duration (Sec)] is not exceeded, contour lines are white.
When [Duration (Sec)] is exceeded, contour lines take on the same color as the detection area, indicating that
“detected” mode has been triggered.
How to Configure Camera Tampering Detection
For [Camera Tampering Detection], the entire video display area is the detection area. The area cannot be changed.
In [Change Ratio (%)], you can set the ratio of screen change for tampering detection to be determined in relation to
the entire video display area.
When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator frame representing the area of the entire video display area
that can be obstructed is displayed for one second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check while
specifying the setting.
Detection Status for Camera Tampering Detection
All moving objects detected are shown with contour lines.
If an object is smaller than [Change Ratio (%)], its contour lines are white.
If the obscured area in the video exceeds [Change Ratio (%)], contour lines take on the same color as the detection
area, indicating that “detected” mode has been triggered.
Important
Set detection areas for removed object detection so that they precisely match the contours of the target object. Influence from the
target object’s shadow or adjacent objects may result in the target object being recognized as larger than it actually is and will not
trigger removed object detection. In this occurs, reconfigure the detection area to outline the recognized target object.
3
Configure [Duration (Sec)] for time required for an object to be detected as a removed object.
Contours of Moving Object Detected as Removed
Change ratio indicator
224
Note
Detection will not be possible for three seconds after the change ratio for camera tampering detection is changed, or when
switching into camera tampering detection from another detection mode.
How to Configure Passing Detection
The detection line for passing moving objects is determined by setting the passing direction and object decision
point.
In the video display area, click the start point of the detection line.
▼
Click another location.
The passing detection line will be set between the start point and next point you clicked.
▼
To configure a polygonal detection line, click the vertices of the line in order.
Contours of Moving Object Detected as Tampering
1
Follow the steps below to use the video display area to configure the passing detection line.
Detection line
Admin Tools
6
225
You can configure a polygonal detection line with a maximum of 32 vertices.
▼
Click any of the set vertices.
The detection line is determined.
Note
• Even after configuring a detection line, you can drag each vertex to change the shape of the detection line and the lines between
vertices to move the entire detection line.
• Click [Clear detection line] to delete a detection line.
If a moving object crosses the detection line in the selected direction, it will be detected as ‘passed’.
A preview display shows the selected passing direction on the detection line in the video display area.
If the selected decision point crosses the detection line, it will be detected as ‘passed’.
The decision point is indicated by a cross on the detection frame of the moving object.
Set the size ratio of moving objects for the entire screen.
If the moving object exceeds the set value for [Object Size (%)], it will be targeted for passing detection.
When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator frame representing the object size is displayed for one
second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while specifying the setting.
Note
A ratio of up to 30% can be set in [Object Size (%)] for passing detection.
2
In [Passing Direction], select the direction for moving objects to pass the detection line.
3
In [Decision Point], select the point of a moving object that will be used for triggering passing detection when the
moving object crosses a detection line.
4
Configure the size of the moving object needed for triggering detection in [Object Size (%)].
Detection line
Passing direction (both direction)
Detection FrameDetection Frame
Decision point (bottom center)
Detection line
Object Size Indicator
226
Detection Status for Passing Detection
All moving objects detected are shown with white contour lines.
When the [Decision Point] of a moving object that exceeds the [Object Size (%)] setting crosses a detection line in
the direction specified in [Passing Direction], The countour line changes to the same color as the detection line, and
“detected” mode is triggered.
A passing detection event notification only occurs when the decision line is crossed. Take care in setting the
operation to be performed when an event occurs.
How to Configure Intrusion Detection
Set the area you want to detect intrusions.
The decision point is indicated by a cross on the detection frame of the moving object.
Set the size ratio of moving objects for the entire screen.
When the setting values or slider is changed, an indicator frame representing the object size is displayed for one
second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size ratio while specifying the setting.
Important
Perform a detection test after configuring passing detection to make sure the detection frame of a moving object continues to be
displayed.
1
Use the video display area to configure the area where you would like to detect intruding objects (P. 219).
2
Configure [Duration (Sec)] for the time required for an object to enter a detection area, and be detected as an
intrusion.
3
In [Decision Point], select the point of a moving object that will be used for triggering intrusion detection when the
moving object enters a detection area.
4
Configure the size of the moving object needed to trigger detection in [Object Size (%)].
Detection Frame
Decision point (bottom center)
Admin Tools
6
227
Detection Status for Intrusion Detection
All moving objects detected are shown with contour lines.
When [Decision Point] of a moving object larger than [Object Size (%)] enters a detection area and exceeds
[Duration (Sec)], its contour lines take on the same color as the detection area, indicating that “detected” mode has
been triggered.
Configure Operations for Triggered Detection ([Event] Tab)
Set operations to be performed upon detection of changes in a subject.
This will also explain the [Event] tab in [Auto Tracking].
(1) Specify Operation Timing (Multiple Selections Possible)
[ON Event Operation]
When selected, the operations set in (3) are performed when “detected” mode is triggered.
[OFF Event Operation]
When selected, the operations set in (3) are performed when “detected” mode ends.
Important
After the Triggered Detection is set, please confirm that the system continues to show contour lines of the Detected Moving
Object.
Object Size Indicator
Detection Area
Contour Lines of Detected Moving Object
Video Detection Auto Tracking
R11
R10
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(5)
(6)
228
[Detected mode Operation]
When selected, the operations set in (3) are performed while “detected” mode is active.
(2) [Action During Auto Tracking]
When selected, the operations set in (3) are performed while the moving object is automatically tracked.
(3) Specify Event Operation (Multiple Selections Possible)
[E-mail Notification]
When selected, e-mail notification is sent according to the timing set in (1) or (2). [Video Record] > [E-mail Notification]
in the Setting Page must be set in advance (P. 102).
[Video Record]
When selected, video recording begins according to the timing specified in (1) or (2). [Video Record] > [Upload] or
[Memory Card] > [Video Record Setting] in the Setting Page must be set in advance (P. 96).
(4) Specify Audio Playback Timing
[Audio Playback at ON Event]
When selected, the sound clip specified in (5) is played back when “detected” mode is triggered.
[Audio Playback at OFF Event]
When selected, the sound clip specified in (5) is played back when “detected” mode ends.
(5) Sound Clip Settings
[Sound Clip Name]
Select the sound clip to be played back. You must register the sound clip with [Video and Audio] > [Audio Settings] >
[Sound Clip Upload] (P. 88) in the Setting Page in advance.
[Volume]
Set the volume for the sound clip.
(6) External Device Output Operations
[External Device Output for ON Event]
Select this to start or pause output to an external device when the “detected” mode is triggered, and to select the
output destination (output 1 or 2) and operation (active or inactive).
[External Device Output for OFF Event]
When “detected” mode ends, select whether or not to begin output to an external device or pause,
and select the output destination (output 1 or 2) and operation (active or inactive.
Reduce Effects of Lighting Change (Detections Settings)
The Intelligent Function may not work when the entire screen is exposed to sudden changes in brightness, for example,
when indoor lights are turned on or off. Changing the detection settings may reduce this effect.
The settings are saved and the Intelligent Function restarts.
R11
R10
R11
M641
M741
R11
M641
M741
R11
M641
M741
1
Click [Detection Settings].
2
Select [Reduce effects of lighting change].
3
Click [Save settings].
Admin Tools
6
229
Context Menu
Right-click on the video detection setting screen to display a menu that allows you to use the following functions.
Unavailable functions will be grayed-out when you right-click.
Note
If you right-click while using auto tracking, the context menu will appear but none of the functions will be available.
[Copy detection area/line]
Copy the detection area/line of the selected detection setting to the clipboard.
[Paste detection area/line]
Paste the copied detection area/line from the clipboard to the detection setting being configured. Paste cannot be used
with camera tampering detection.
Pasting a detection line is possible only when the source and the target both set passing detection.
[Clear detection area/line]
Delete the detection area/line of the selected detection setting. The camera tampering detection area cannot be deleted.
[Copy detection criteria settings]
Copy the detection criteria of the selected detection setting to the clipboard.
[Paste detection criteria settings]
Paste the copied detection criteria from the clipboard to the detection setting being configured. Pasting is possible only if
the source and the target are the same detection type.
[Copy event settings]
Copy the event setting of the selected detection setting to the clipboard.
[Paste event settings]
Paste the copied event setting from the clipboard to the detection setting being configured.
Important
• It takes several seconds for the Intelligent Function to restart. No detection is performed while restarting.
• Settings in [Reduce effects of lighting change] may not work depending on the operating environment. Sudden changes in
brightness that persist may also have the same effect. Perform a detection test to check whether settings work correctly.
230
For Auto Tracking, set the detection area for moving objects while checking the video on the computer screen. The camera
is controlled so that the detected moving object appears near the center of the video display area. You can also set which
operations (such as e-mail notification, recording video, or playing audio from the speaker connected to the camera) are
carried out when detection occurs.
Set Auto Tracking
Use the following steps to set Auto Tracking.
For details on how to adjust presets, please refer to “Register Presets” (P. 170).
If you select [Specify the initial camera position], the camera angle will be moved to the selected preset position.
The camera angle will also be moved to the selected preset position after Auto Tracking ends.
Note
You can select presets that meet the following conditions.
– Presets configured within the view restrictions.
– Presets with [Show in viewers] selected in the [Preset Registration] tab (P. 171).
– Presets with pan, tilt and zoom setting values (no empty entries) configured in the [Preset Registration] tab (P. 171).
Intelligent Function Setting Tool
- Auto Tracking -
R11
R10
1
Obtain camera control privileges to set Auto Tracking. (P. 158)
2
Select [Specify the initial camera position] in [Camera Position Settings], then select a preset.
Important
It is recommended that you configure preset camera angles in advance, so the camera will move to the preset position when auto
tracking starts or ends.
Admin Tools
6
231
Use a rectangle to specify the detection area (P. 219).
Note
The detection area is set to display within a rectangular area by default. It cannot be set to the edge of the video display area.
Set the size ratio of moving objects for the entire screen.
When the setting values or slider is changed, or the detection area is changed, an indicator frame representing
the object size is displayed for one second in the center of the video display area allowing you to check the size
ratio while specifying the setting.
After the subject is in “detected” mode, the camera tracks it for the specified time.
When selected, the camera zooms in on the moving object and automatically tracks it.
3
Configure the detection area in the video display area.
4
Configure the size the moving object needed to trigger detection in [Object Size (%)] in the [Tracking Conditions]
tab.
5
To configure the time to continue auto tracking, select [Set the tracking duration] and set the time in [Tracking
Duration (Sec)].
6
To automatically zoom in on the moving object while tracking, select [Enable auto zoom during tracking].
Object Size Indicator
Detection Area
232
For details on settings, please refer to “Configure Operations for Triggered Detection ([Event] Tab)” (P. 227).
The settings are saved to the camera.
If you keep control privileges, an ON event is triggered as “detected” mode and the camera does not
automatically track even when a subject is detected that meets tracking start conditions.
For the camera to automatically track moving objects, it is necessary to release control privileges.
Detection Status for Auto Tracking
All moving objects detected are shown with contour lines.
If a moving object is smaller than [Object Size (%)], its contour lines are white.
If the moving object is larger than [Object Size (%)], its contour lines take on the same color as the detection area,
indicating that “detected” mode has been triggered.
In “detected” mode, auto tracking starts and a polygon frame appears on the target object.
The camera will pan, tilt or zoom during auto tracking so the target object always appears at the center of the screen.
When [Enable auto zoom during tracking] is selected, the camera zooms in on the target and auto tracks.
7
In the [Event] tab, configure the operations to be performed when “detected” mode is triggered.
8
Click [Save settings].
9
In the message box displayed, click [Yes].
Contour Lines of Detected Moving Object
Detection Area
Admin Tools
6
233
Auto tracking will start to track the first detected moving object. While auto tracking, other moving objects will not be
detected even if they satisfy [Tracking Start Conditions].
Auto Tracking Termination
Auto tracking will be terminated in the following cases.
• Camera control privileges for auto tracking were revoked due to the following conditions.
– The Admin Viewer obtained camera control privileges.
– The camera moved to a preset position due to the triggering of a volume detection event or an external input device.
– The camera panned or tilted due to the creation of a panorama image.
– You obtained camera control privileges using viewer operations for auto tracking.
• The configured auto [Tracking Duration] time has elapsed.
• Tracking cannot continue because sight of the moving object was lost (examples: movement of target object was lost,
target object is lost in shadow of another object, target object falls below the sizes possible for tracking, target object
moves outside the possible tracking area).
• The [Intelligent Function Tool] has restarted.
When auto tracking is terminated, a tracking OFF event is triggered and the camera returns to the initial camera position
(when [Specify the initial camera position] has been selected). If camera control privileges were revoked, the camera will
move after camera control privileges are released.
Tracking start conditions are enabled after the camera moves back to the initial position.
Disable Auto Tracking
You can disable Auto Tracking by restarting the Intelligent Function Setting Tool and selecting [Video Detection] (P. 214) in
the Intelligent Function selection screen.
Important
• When setting the Auto Tracking Function, it is recommended that you test the auto detection, to confirm that object will continue
to be detected.
• Large objects closest to the center of the screen will be tracked with priority during tracking.
• During Auto Tracking, the object itself is not being recognized. Thus when two objects pass each other, or there are multiple
moving objects, proper tracking of the object may not be possible.
• The camera will not track the subject if camera control privileges are enabled on the Intelligent Function Setting Tool. To allow
automatic tracking with the camera, you must release the camera control privileges on the Intelligent Function Setting Tool.
• While auto tracking, preset tours will not start.
• Auto tracking beyond view restrictions is not possible.
• The privacy mask areas are also part of the auto tracking detection area.
Auto Tracking Target Frame
R11
234
This explains functions common to both video detection and auto tracking.
Display Event Status
Click the [Event Display] button to open the Event Display panel and confirm the detection status icon of the Intelligent
Function.
This panel displays the same information as [Intelligent Function] in the Event Display panel of the Admin Viewer (P. 184).
Note
If the detection setting is not saved in the camera, only the detection status for the currently selected detection setting or auto tracking is
displayed.
Display Settings for Detection Areas/Detection Lines, Detection Results
(Display Options)
Configure whether or not detection areas/lines and detection results appear in the video display area.
Video Detection
You can select the following for either [Detection Area/Line] or [Detection Results].
[Selected Detection Settings Only]
Show the detection areas/lines or detection results only for those detection settings selected in [Detection Setting
List].
[All Detection Settings]
Show the detection areas/lines or detection results for all detection settings in [Detection Setting List].
Intelligent Function Setting Tool
Display Options and Shared Operations
Event Display Button
Event Display for Detection Settings Event Display for Auto Tracking
R11
R10
Admin Tools
6
235
[Detection Settings of the Same Type]
Show the detection areas/lines or detection results for the same type of detection settings as those selected in
[Detection Setting List].
[Do not display]
No detection areas/lines or detection results are shown.
Auto Tracking
You can select [Display] / [Do not display] for either [Detection Area] or [Detection Results].
Restart Intelligent Function
If the background video has changed while you were specifying settings or detection results are not as specified, restart
the Intelligent Function.
R11
R10
1
If you have not yet obtained the camera control privileges, click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control Privileges]
button and obtain the control privileges.
2
Click [Restart intelligent function].
Important
It takes several tens of seconds for the Intelligent Function to restart. No detection is performed while restarting.
236
This Viewer allows browsing the camera operation status logs recorded in the camera. You can also download the log from
the camera and save the file.
Download Log Files
When you launch the Log Viewer, the latest log files will be automatically downloaded from the camera and displayed in a
list.
If you want to load a log file from the memory card or get a new list of log files, follow the steps below to download.
The [Download] dialog box appears.
The logs in the camera memory or on the memory card will be displayed as a list.
The selected log file will be downloaded and the source for the log is displayed as follows.
• [Camera (internal memory)]: for camera built-in memory
Log Viewer
Log Viewer Screen
1
Click [Download].
2
Select [Internal memory] or [Memory Card] as the download source.
3
Select a log file and click [Download].
Admin Tools
6
237
• [Camera (memory card)]: for the memory card
• File Name: for files saved on a computer
View Logs
The following information appears in the log.
[Code]
The log message code (P. 256).
The log code is shown together with one of three icons corresponding to the applicable level.
If the log has no log code, no icon is shown.
[Date & Time]
The date and time at which the log was generated.
[Message]
A message regarding the log.
Note
• In the Windows Control Panel, the decimal point in a value is always indicated by “.” regardless of the settings of [Region and
Language]. Also, the date is shown in the “yyyy/mm/dd” or “mm/dd” format, while the time is shown in the “hh:mm:ss” format. (y, m, d, h,
m, and s indicate year, month, day, hour, minute, and second, respectively)
• Logs cannot be deleted in the Log Viewer.
Save/Open a Log File
You can save the log file as a text file to a computer. You can also load log files that are saved on a computer to the
Log Viewer.
Save to Computer
The [Save As] dialog box appears.
Load from Computer
The [Open file] dialog box appears.
Copy Log Data
Copy log data to the clipboard.
Information Level
Warning LevelError Level
1
Click [Save to local file].
2
Select the location to save and click [Save].
3
Click [Open local file].
4
Select a log file to load and click [Open].
1
Click to select the log you want to copy.
238
Search for a Log
If the searched log is found, it is shown as selected.
Click [Previous] or [Next] to search for the logs above or below. Lines of logs found are shown as selected.
Show Filtered Logs
You can filter logs by type, code and date and time to only show necessary information.
(1) [Log Type]
[Not specified]
Logs will not be filtered.
[Specify type]
Select [Error], [Warning] or [Information] for the level if logs are filtered by their levels.
To use the module output by the log for filtering, select [Application], [HTTP Server] or [System].
[Application], [HTTP Server], and [System] support the List of Log Messages (P. 256).
[Specify code]
Logs will be filtered by log code. Only logs whose code contains the entered characters are shown. If “A0” is
entered, for example, logs starting with “A0” are displayed.
2
Click [Copy].
1
Enter the search string into [Search for] in [Search].
2
Click [Search].
1
Configure [Filter] conditions.
(1)
(2)
Admin Tools
6
239
(2) [Date & Time]
[Specify start date & time]
When selected and a date and time are entered, logs generated on or after the specified date and time are
shown.
[Specify end date & time]
When selected and a date and time are entered, logs generated on or before the specified date and time
are shown.
Only shows logs matching the specified conditions.
2
Click [Apply filter]
Important
The logs saved in the camera will be deleted in the following cases.
– When [Reboot] or [Restore Default Settings] in [Maintenance] > [Tool] on the Setting Page are run.
– Factory default settings are restored with the reset switch on the camera.
240
This is a utility for browsing and managing video recorded on a memory card inserted in the camera. You can display a list
of recorded video, and play back, delete and download video.
Note
When a large number of files have been recorded onto a memory card, the Recorded Video Utility can take a considerable amount of time
to process the video list (the greater the number of files, the longer it will take). Please reduce the number of days saved in [Auto Video
Delete], or manually delete unneeded files with the Recorded Video Utility, on a regular basis.
The number of files saved on the memory card can greatly be reduced, by using H.264 as the video format, instead of JPEG.
Use the Video List
Video List Display Information
Note
If you click the header of each item, you can change the sort order (ascending or descending) for that item.
(1) [Date & Time]
Displays the date and time of a video recording.
(2) [Format]
Displays the format of a recorded video ([JPEG] or [H.264]).
(3) [Recording Type]
Displays the types of recorded video.
• [Upload]: Video failed to upload from the camera
• [Manual]: Manually recorded video
• [Timer]: Video recorded using the timer
• [Event]: Video recording triggered by an event
• [Recording-Mode Stream]: Video that has failed video distribution when using RM recording-mode stream
Recorded Video Utility
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Header
Admin Tools
6
241
• [ONVIF]: Video recorded with ONVIF
(4) [Video in Camera]
Displays whether or not any video remains on a memory card.
When video has been deleted from a memory card after downloading it, this indicator displays [No].
(5) [Download Status]
Displays download status of video ([Downloaded], [Not Downloaded], [Partially Downloaded]).
Refresh Video List
Click [Refresh Video List] to update the video list to the current state.
Click [Refresh Download Status] to update download status of the video list to the current state.
Display Memory Card Information
Click [Memory Card Details] to display information on the memory card inserted in the camera.
Narrow Down the Number of Videos
Use [Filter] to narrow down the number of videos that appear in the video list to the ones you need.
(1) [Date & Time]
[Specify start date & time]
When this checkbox is selected and a date and time are entered, videos recorded on or after the specified
date and time are shown.
[Specify end date & time]
When this checkbox is selected and a date and time are entered, videos recorded on or before the specified
date and time are shown.
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(6)
242
(2) [Video Format]
Select [Specified], then select the video formats you would like to display (multiple selections possible).
(3) [Recording Type]
Select [Specified], then select the video recording types you would like to display (multiple selections
possible).
(4) [Video in Camera]
Filters by whether or not video is saved to a memory card.
(5) [Download Status]
Select [Specified], then select the download status you would like to display (multiple selections possible).
(6) [Apply filter]
When this is clicked, only the videos matching the specified conditions are displayed.
Download/Delete Video
Download video recorded on a memory card inserted in the camera to a computer.
You can also delete video on a memory card or that has been downloaded to a computer.
Download Video
Click [Browse] and specify the folder in the dialog box that appears.
To select multiple videos, click the videos while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key.
Click [Select All] to select all videos.
The video is downloaded to the specified folder.
Note
If you change the download folder, the download status of the files in the download folder prior to the change becomes [Not
Downloaded]. Manually copy the files in the download folder prior to the change to the new download folder to change their status
to [Downloaded].
Downloaded videos are stored in a folder that is automatically created within the specified destination folder and named using the
camera IP address (for example, [192.168.100.1]). Exit the Recorded Video Utility before using Explorer to browse the folders
before and after the change and copy the contents of the folder with the same name as the camera IP address.
1
Enter in [Download to] the path to the folder for downloading video.
2
Click to select a video in the video list for download.
3
Click [Download].
Important
Since the Recorded Video Utility processes both files downloaded to a computer and its original videos recorded to the memory
card, the video list will not display correctly if you manually delete files downloaded to a computer. If you manually delete files,
click [Refresh Download Status] to refresh status of data downloaded to a computer.
Admin Tools
6
243
After copying, launch the Recorded Video Utility, click [Refresh Download Status] and the manually copied files will appear in the
video list.
For details on the folder configuration and file naming rules for the download location, please refer to “Data Downloaded with
Recorded Video Utility” (P. 250).
Delete Video
Delete video on a memory card or that has been downloaded to a computer.
Delete Video on a Memory Card
The video on the memory card will be deleted.
Note
• If the selected videos contain [Not Downloaded] videos, a message prompting you to confirm deletion appears.
• The more files that you select to delete, the long it takes to delete the video. For example, if you delete an hour’s worth of video (it
may only show as being one item in the video list), it can take several minutes.
Delete Downloaded Video from a Computer
The video is deleted from the computer.
1
Select a video to delete in the video list.
2
Click [Delete from Camera].
1
Select a [Downloaded] video in the video list to delete from the computer.
2
Click [Delete Downloaded Video].
244
Move Downloaded Video to a Different Computer Folder
The [Browse For Folder] dialog box appears.
The video is moved to the specified folder.
Export Movie Files for Playback
Video downloaded to a computer can be exported in the “.mov” format that can be played back on a computer.
For H.264 video, subdivided files are merged into a single file.
Videos whose [Download Status] is labeled [Downloaded] in the video list can be exported.
The [Browse For Folder] dialog box appears.
The video is exported.
Note
• The exported video files can be played back using QuickTime 7.7 and Windows Media Player 11/12. For the Windows Vista
operating system or earlier, use QuickTime. However, playback when using this software is not guaranteed.
• Recorded JPEG video whose video size was changed during recording and exported to a “.mov” file cannot be played back by
Windows Media Player. Use QuickTime to play it back.
1
Select a [Downloaded] video in the video list to move.
2
Click [Move Downloaded Video].
3
Select a folder to move to and click [OK].
1
Select a video to export in the video list.
2
Click [Export to mov format].
3
Select a folder to export to and click [OK].
Admin Tools
6
245
Play Back Video
Video selected in the video list can be played back in the [Playback Videos] area.
The way to play back video differs depending on the video format.
Note
For [Downloaded] video, the video is played back on the computer. For video that has not completed download, video on the memory card
is played back.
Play Back JPEG Video
The first frame and information for the selected video will appear in [Playback Videos].
(1) [Recording Date & Time]
Displays the date and time of video frames that are being displayed.
(2) [Playback Frame No.]
Displays frame numbers and total number of video frames that are being displayed.
(3) [Playback Interval]
[Real Time]
JPEG video is played back in real time interval according to the recording time. The preceding JPEG video
appears in an empty frame. [Real Time] can be selected only for playback of downloaded videos.
[Equal Interval]
JPEG video is played back at a 1-second interval.
(4) Playback Controls
Controls used for playback.
Note
[Not Downloaded] or [Partially Downloaded] videos may not be played back in the order they were recorded.
(1) Slider
Drag the slider to change playback position.
1
Select JPEG video in the video list for playback.
2
Use the playback controls for playback.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
246
(2) Control Buttons
The function of each button is as follows:
(3) [Save Playback Frame As]
Video frames that are being played back can be saved as a separate file.
Play Back H.264 Video
Note
When you are using Internet Explorer 11 in a 64-bit operating system and the camera is registered as a trusted site and protected
mode is enabled, playback of H.264 video will be disabled.
The Software Product License Agreement dialog box appears.
The H.264 decoder is downloaded from the camera.
The first frame and information for the selected video will appear in [Playback Videos].
Move to first frame
Move to previous frame
Fast reverse
Playback
Pause
Fast forward
Move to next frame
Move to last frame
1
Select [Enable H.264 playback].
2
Click [Yes].
3
Select H.264 video in the video list for playback.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Admin Tools
6
247
(1) [Recording Date & Time]
Displays the date and time of video frames that are being displayed.
(2) [Playback File No.]
Displays file numbers and total number of video files that are being displayed.
(3) [Playback Interval]
[Real Time]
JPEG video is played back in real time interval according to the recording time. The preceding JPEG video
appears in an empty frame. [Real Time] can be selected only for playback of downloaded videos.
[Equal Interval]
Even for video where frames were recorded intermittently, playback is shortened by only playing back the
interval just before the empty frames.
(4) Playback Control
Controls used for playback.
Note
• For [Not Downloaded] or [Partially Downloaded] video, if a file is played back while still downloading, playback may momentarily
pause when switching files, depending on the network environment.
• [Not Downloaded] or [Partially Downloaded] videos may not be played back in the order they were recorded.
(1) Slider
Drag the slider to change playback position.
(2) Control Buttons
The function of each button is as follows:
(3) [Save Playback Frame As]
Video frames that are being played back can be saved as a separate file.
Playback H.264 Video with External Player
The external player playback screen appears.
4
Use the playback controls for playback.
Move to first frame
Move to previous frame
Playback
Pause
Move to next frame
Move to last frame
1
Clear the [Enable H.264 playback] check box.
2
Select H.264 video in the video list for playback.
(1)
(2)
(3)
248
(1) [Number of downloaded video files]
The number of downloaded files the video consists of is displayed.
(2) [Playback with External Player]
Launch an external player (Windows Media Player, etc.) and the selected video is played back.
(3) [Open Video folder]
Open the folder storing the selected video. Double click the video file in the folder to play it back.
Note
• The downloaded H.264 video file will have the “.mov” extension.
• When the data size for “.mov” files is 1 MB or greater, they are split into several files.
• If “.mov” files are split into several files, only the initial few seconds of the first file can be played back.
• The downloaded video files can be played back using QuickTime 7.7 and Windows Media Player 11/12. For the Windows Vista
operating system or earlier, use QuickTime. However, playback when using this software is not guaranteed.
3
Use the external player for playback.
(2)
(3)
(1)
Chapter
Appendix
This chapter provides supplementary information on camera functions and explains the measure to take when
trouble occurs or a message appears during camera use. It also explains how to reset the camera to the
factory default setting state.
250
This section explains the data saved to the memory card and the video data downloaded from the memory card to the
computer.
Saved Data and Data Organization of Memory Card
When [Operation Settings] is set to [Save Logs and Videos] in [Memory Card] > [Memory Card Operations] (P. 130), the
following data is saved automatically to the memory card inserted in the camera.
• Image files of recording-mode stream that could not be distributed due to a network error (JPEG only)
• Video files when HTTP or FTP upload failed (JPEG/H.264(1))
• Video files manually recorded by the user from the Admin Viewer (JPEG/H.264(1))
• Video files recorded by [External Device Input], [Volume Detection] and the intelligent functions when an event occurs
(JPEG/H.264(1))
• Video files recorded using a timer (JPEG/H.264(1))
•Log
Note
Saving to the memory card becomes no longer possible when there is no space remaining on the memory card. When [Memory Card] >
[Memory Card Operations] > [Overwrite videos] (P. 132) is set to [Enable], old video can be deleted to save new video. When it is set to
[Disable], use Recorded Video Utility to delete unnecessary video.
Data Downloaded with Recorded Video Utility
When the video data of the memory card is downloaded to a computer or other device using Recorded Video Utility, it is
saved under a folder structure and file name like the following.
Folder Structure
Example: H.264 video, manually recorded using a camera with an IP address of 192.168.100.1, on Sept. 10, 2014,
from 16:00:00 to 16:59:59 (Camera Time Zone: GMT+09:00).
(1) Folder specified with [Download to]
(2) IP address of the camera
(3) Video recording date
(4) Recording start and end times (UTC)
(5) Time difference from UTC
(6) Recording type
E: Event
M: Manual recording
R: Recording-mode stream
T: Timer
U: Upload
O: ONVIF
(7) Video format (JPEG or H.264)
Note
• A folder is created once per hour.
• If the time difference is added to the starting and ending times, it will equal the local time.
Memory Card Data
D:\work \ 192.168.100.1 \ 20140910 \ 070000_075959 _ +9 _ M _ H264
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Appendix
7
251
File Name Format
Example: Video, manually recorded on Sept. 10, 2014, starting from 16:06:19 (Camera Time Zone: GMT+09:00).
(1) Video recording date
(2) File creation time (UTC)
(3) Recording start time (UTC)
(4) Recording type
E: Event
M: Manual recording
R: Recording-mode stream
T: Timer
U: Upload
O: ONVIF
Note
• The file creation time will be earlier than the actual start of recording time.
• If multiple video files were created because recording continued for several seconds or more, a new file name with different
values for (2) and the sequential number ending will be used. In the above example, if recording starts at (16:06:19), and the new
file is switched to 4 seconds later, the file name will be as follows.
20140910070623-070619-M000000002.mov
Since this is a continuation of the recording that started at 16:09:19, the recording start time (3) will remain as “070619”. The
sequential number at the end of the file name will be increased by one increment.
20140910 070618 - 070619 - M 000000001.mov
(1) (2) (3) (4)
252
According to the setting item, you can specify parameters using modifier “% characters”.
Note
• A runtime error will occur if the specified name does not match.
• If this modifier is not defined, “%” will be deleted.
Modifiers
Modifiers
Meaning Description of character string entered
%n Reason for capture (number) 0 (test) | 1 (External device input 1) | 2 (External device input 2) |
33 (Timer 1) | 34 (Timer 2) | 35 (Timer 3) | 36 (Timer 4) | 145 (Volume detection) | 146 (Scream
Detection) |160 (Auto Tracking) |161 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 1) |
162 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 2) | 163 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 3) |
164 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 4) | 165 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 5) |
166 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 6) | 167 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 7) |
168 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 8) | 169 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 9) |
170 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 10) | 171 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 11) |
172 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 12) | 173 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 13) |
174 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 14) | 175 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 15) |
201 (Linked Event 1) | 202 (Linked Event 2) | 203 (Linked Event 3) | 204 (Linked Event 4)
%N Reason for capture
(character string)
<External input device name (alphanumeric characters) > | Intelligent Function Detection Setting name
| NULL (blank entry or interval timer test)
%O Reason for capture (ON/OFF) OFF | ON
%X Width of image Number of pixels in horizontal direction
%Y Height of image Number of pixels in vertical direction
%C Camera number 1
%D Camera Name Setting for [Camera Name (alphanumeric characters)]
%P Pan position -179.99 – 180.00 0
%T Tilt position -179.99 – 180.00 0
%Z Zoom position 0.01 – 300.00
%R Rotation position 0
%V Camera server VB-R11VE/VB-R11/VB-R10VE/VB-M641VE/VB-M641V/VB-M640VE/VB-M640V/VB-M741LE/
VB-M740E
%y Year of capture time 2001 – 2031
%m Month of capture time 01 – 12
%d Day of capture time 01 – 31
%w Day of week of capture time 0 – 6 (Sunday to Saturday)
%H Hours of capture time 00 – 23
%M Minutes of capture time 00 – 59
%S Seconds of capture time 00 – 59
%s Milliseconds of capture time 000 – 999
%Z Time zone of capture time -1200 – +1300
%a Weekday name of capture
time
Sun | Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat
%b Month name of capture time Jan | Feb | Mar | Apr | May | Jun | Jul | Aug | Sep | Oct | Nov | Dec
%h Host Name
R11 R10
M641 M640
M741
M740
R11
R10
M641
M640
M741
M740
Appendix
7
253
Available Modifiers
The modifiers that can be used for each setting item are specified below.
[HTTP Upload] (P. 97)
[Parameter (query string)]
All modifiers can be used.
[FTP Upload] (P. 99)
[Subdirectory Name to Create]
Only the modifiers %y, %m, %d, %w, %H, %h, %n can be used.
[File Name to Create]
Only the modifiers %y, %m, %d, %w, %H, %M, %S, %s, %n can be used.
[E-mail Notification] (P. 102)
[Message Body]
All modifiers can be used.
254
Before contacting the dealer where you purchased the product or Canon Customer Service Center, check the items
specified as follows. If a log message is displayed, check the details of the message and corresponding countermeasure in
the log message list.
Troubleshooting
Problem Countermeasures
The camera does not launch. • If you are using a PoE hub, check if the LAN cable is connected correctly.
• If you are using an AC adapter (sold separately), check if the AC adapter is
connected correctly.
• Turn the camera off and on again (please refer to “Installation Guide” > “Connecting
the Camera”).
Camera Management Tool does not operate. • Check if the LAN cable is connected correctly.
• Turn the camera off and on again (please refer to “Installation Guide” > “Connecting
the Camera”).
• Check if the camera and the computers in which the Camera Management Tool is
operating are connected to the LAN in the same segment.
• The Camera Management Tool may not function when the [Windows Firewall] function
is enabled. If that happens, refer to “Check/Make Security Settings” (P. 31).
The top page of the camera is not displayed. • Check if the LAN cable is connected correctly.
• Check if the network to which the camera is connected is set up correctly. In
particular, check if the IP address, subnet mask and default gateway address are set
within the ranges supported by the applicable network.
• If you have changed the IP address, the new address will not become effective until
the camera is rebooted.
• Check if the correct URI (camera IP address) is entered in your web browser (P. 37,
P. 41).
• Check whether the connection is from a computer whose access is blocked in
[Security] > [Host Access Restrictions] on the Setting Page.
• Check the authentication method, [User Name], [Password], combination of
certificates, and network rules for connection in [Security] > [802.1X] on the Setting
Page with the system administrator.
The Admin Tools will not launch.
The Admin Viewer will not launch.
• If the message “Your web browser is not supported.” is displayed, use Internet
Explorer 8 or later.
• If the message “Application could not be started. Install .NET Framework x.x (x is the
version).” is displayed, install the corresponding version of .NET Framework or enable
settings (P. 24).
• If the message “JavaScript is not available or disabled on your web browser.” is
displayed, set [Active Script] to [Enable] in Internet Explorer’s security settings.
(please refer to (3) below for instructions on how to set this.)
• If the message “The settings from (1) to (3) below must be carried out to use the Admin
Viewer and Admin Tools.” is displayed, set the following.
(1) Use the installer to install your Admin Tools Certificate (P. 28) .
(2) When using Internet Explorer 9 or later, follow the steps in “Register the
Camera IP Address as a Trusted Site” (P. 32)and add this web site to [Trusted
sites] in Internet Explorer’s security settings.
(3) In Internet Explorer click [Tools] > [Internet Option] > [Security] > [Custom
level] and under the Security Settings list, set [XAML browser applications],
[File download] and [Launching programs and files in an IFRAME] to [Enable].
Video is not displayed. • If you wish to improve video quality, adjust it by changing the video size, video quality,
and frame rate settings in [Basic Settings] > [Video Settings] (P. 72) in the Setting
Page.
• Up to 30 viewers can access the camera at the same time. If this limit has been
exceeded, video is not displayed and a message appears.
There is no audio. • If there is no audio, check the audio server settings of the camera and also check the
sound and audio device settings for the computers.
• If you are using the Admin Viewer with the administrator authorities, check if the
camera is connected to the RM Viewer or another viewer that lets the administrator
use audio.
• In VB Viewer, audio cannot be used if the Canon Network Camera Audio Receiver
add-on is not installed.
R11
M641
M741
Appendix
7
255
The camera cannot be controlled. • If you connect the Admin Viewer as an administrator, you will have exclusive
possession of the camera control privileges. If you connect to the Admin Viewer as an
Authorized User, you cannot control the camera unless the administrator releases
camera control. Consult the Administrator (P. 138).
The viewer gets disconnected. • Check the network and computer for abnormality.
• Reboot the computer and connect again.
You forgot your password. • You can initialize all settings of the camera excluding date and time using the reset
switch (P. 270). The administrator password required for initialization is “camera”.
Note, however, that network settings such as the IP address and subnet mask will be
initialized and must be set again.
Data cannot be uploaded. • Check that the upload destination of [Video Record] > [Upload] and the upload
operation upon an event of the [Event] menu are both set correctly.
• You can perform an operation check based on the currently set upload destination by
running a test from the [Upload] menu (P. 99).
• Check [Maintenance] > [Tool] > [View Logs] or logs on the server to check the detailed
operating environment. For details on [View Logs], please refer to “Uploader error”
(P. 259), “Uploader warning” (P. 262), or “Uploader notification” (P. 265) of “List of Log
Messages”. Also please refer to “Important” on P. 96.
• For the server settings, contact your System Administrator.
Video cannot be recorded on an memory
card.
• To record video to an memory card when an event occurs, check the [Video Record
Action] settings under [Video Record] > [Memory Card] >[Video Record Setting] in
the Setting Page. When [Video Record Action] is set to [Upload], change it to [Record
to Memory Card].
• When recording-mode stream video that could not be transmitted due to network
errors or video for which the HTTP/FTP upload failed is not stored on the memory card,
check [Operation Settings] under [Video Record] > [Memory Card] > [Memory Card
Operations] in the Setting Page. When [Operation Settings] is set to [Save Log],
change it to [Save Logs and Videos].
• To manually save recordings to an memory card, obtain camera control privileges.
Files cannot be saved in the Setting Page or
Admin Tools.
• Windows prohibits saving to certain folders. Accordingly, an attempt to save a file may
fail. Specify [Documents], [Pictures] and other folders.
A message indicating “Cannot access the
memory card. Please recreate the video
management information on the Setting
Page” appears when Recorded Video Utility
is launched.
• Select [Memory Card Information] under [Video Record] > [Memory Card] in the
Setting Page to check [Video Management Information Status]. When [Video
Management Information Recreation Required] is displayed, click [Exec] in [Recreate
Video Management Information] under [Memory Card Operations]. When video
management information has been recreated, make sure that [Video Management
Information Status] is [Normal].
It takes a long time for the Recorded Video
Utility to display the video list.
• When a large number of files have been recorded onto a memory card, the Recorded
Video Utility can take a considerable amount of time to process the video list (the
greater the number of files, the longer it will take). Please reduce the number of days
saved in [Auto Video Delete], or manually delete unneeded files with the Recorded
Video Utility, on a regular basis.
The number of files saved on the memory card can greatly be reduced, by using
H.264 as the video format, instead of JPEG.
Problem Countermeasures
256
Log Messages on the Camera
This is a list of log messages that appear in the Log Viewer (P. 236).
Log messages are classified into the following types.
Note
If no content is recorded in a log for approximately two hours, “-- MARK --” will be recorded in the message area.
Error Log
System Error
S302 Error on saving settings [err]
S303 Error on saving settings [err]
S307 Error on saving settings [err]
S310 Working error in event service [err]
List of Log Messages
Category Level Code Fault level
crit Error 4xx Software-level failure (Task operations will stop)
err Error 3xx Operational error (Operations will continue)
warning Warning 2xx Non-operational error
notice Warning 1xx Error external to the system
info Information 0xx Information on normal operation
Description Can’t update system settings (S302)
Meaning An error generated while the system
was saving a setting. Setting could not
be saved.
Countermeasure Provide enough memory space by
deleting unnecessary files in the user
memory area, etc.
Description Can’t update files of system settings
(S303)
Meaning An error generated while the system
was saving a setting. Setting could not
be saved.
Countermeasure Provide enough memory space by
deleting unnecessary files in the user
memory area, etc.
Description (vbadmin.c XXX) Can’t update system
settings (S307)
Meaning An error generated while the settings
were saved by the setup protocol.
Setting could not be saved.
Countermeasure Provide enough memory space by
deleting unnecessary files in the user
memory area, etc.
Description cannot work event [%1][%2][%3]
(S310)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
%3 Error information
Meaning An error occurred while the event
service was running.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Appendix
7
257
S311 Working error in external input/output
service [err]
S312 Working error in timer service [err]
S320 PAN/TILT operation error [err]
S330 Failure of fan [err]
S331 Failure of heater [err]
S410 Event service initialization error [crit]
S411 External input/output service
initialization error [crit]
S412 Timer service initialization error [crit]
Description cannot work extio [%1][%2][%3]
(S311)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
%3 Error information
Meaning An error occurred while the external
input/output device service was
running.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description cannot work timer [%1][%2][%3]
(S312)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
%3 Error information
Meaning An internal error occurred in the timer
service.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description %1 error occurred. [%2] (S320)
%1 PAN | TILT
%2 Warning details
Meaning An error occurred during operation or
stopping of PAN/TILT.
Countermeasure Check that the camera is not touching
the dome, etc.
If the error is not caused by problems
such as contact with peripheral items,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description FAN [%1] failure (S330)
%1 Fan number
Meaning Detected that the fan is not rotating or
the rotation speed has significantly
decreased.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the fan may have failed. Arrange for
servicing.
Description HEATER [%1] failure (S331)
%1 Heater number
Meaning An abnormality was detected when
using the heater.
Countermeasure There may be a connection problem
with the heater unit you attached, so
check the connections (VB-M641VE).
If the problem persists after rebooting,
the heater may have failed. Arrange for
servicing.
Description event initialization error [%1][%2]
(S410)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
Meaning An error occurred in the initialization of
the event service.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description extio initialization error [%1][%2]
(S411)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
Meaning An error occurred in the initialization of
the external input/output device
service.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description timer initialization error [%1][%2]
(S412)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
Meaning An error occurred in the initialization of
the timer service.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
258
S413 Timer service runtime error [crit]
S420 External IO controller has failed [err]
S430 Failure of temperature sensor [crit]
Audio server error
B301 Audio device error [err]
B402 Audio server initialization failed [err]
B403 Settings change failed [err]
Video error
V300 Video input error [err]
V320 Internal error in intelligent service [err]
V321 Pseudo mode setting error in intelligent
service [err]
Description timer working error [%1] (S413)
%1 Error number
Meaning An error occurred while the timer
service was running.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description external io controller is broken.(S420)
Meaning The external IO controller has failed.
Countermeasure The external IO controller firmware
must be updated. If the problem
persists after updating the firmware,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description Cannot get temperature (S430)
Meaning The temperature cannot be acquired
from the temperature sensor.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the circuit board may have failed.
Arrange for servicing.
Description cannot use audio device for
%1[%2:%3] (B301)
%1 Send/Receive type (rx | tx)
%2 Error type (open | write | flush)
%3 Error number
Meaning Detected an error in the audio device
Countermeasure If the problem persists, please arrange
for servicing.
Description wvaudio initialization error [%1] (B402)
%1 Error number
Meaning The audio server could not be
initialized. The audio server stops.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description cannot set config [%1:%2] (B403)
%1 Error notification number
%2 Error number
Meaning The settings could not be updated.
The audio server stops.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description video %1 warning - %2 (V300)
%1 Video number
Meaning An error in the video input was
detected that may adversely affect the
operation of the camera.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description cannot work intelligent [%1][%2][%3].
(V320)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
%3 Error information
Meaning An internal error occurred in intelligent
service.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description pseudo mode setting fail. (V321)
Meaning An error occurred in the pseudo mode
setting of intelligent service.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Appendix
7
259
V400 Video input initialization error [crit]
V401 Video input command error [crit]
V402 Video input frozen [crit]
V403 Video input error [crit]
V420 Could not start intelligent service [crit]
V421 Intelligent service error [crit]
Uploader error
A470 Uploader initialization failed [crit]
Memory card error
M301 Memory card control module error [err]
M302 Cannot remove invalid file [err]
Description video %1 initialization failure - %2(%3)
(V400)
%1 Video number
%2 Process description
%3 Error details
Meaning The video input function was stopped
because the video input system could
not be initialized.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description video %1 command error - %2(%3)
(V401)
%1 Video number
%2 Process description
%3 Error details
Meaning The video input function was stopped
because a video input command could
not be processed.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description video %1 stalled (V402)
%1 Video number
Meaning The video input function was stopped
because video generation stopped.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description video %1 fatal error - %2 (V403)
%1 Video number
%2 Error number
Meaning The video input function was stopped
because an error that does not permit
recovery of the video input system was
detected.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description intelligent initialization error [%1][%2].
(V420)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
Meaning Failed to initialize intelligent service.
Countermeasuret If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description intelligent working error [%1][%2].
(V421)
%1 Error number
%2 Cause of error
Meaning An error that does not permit recovery
occurred while intelligent service was
running.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description uploader initialization failure - %1
(A470)
%1 Error number
Meaning The uploader could not be initialized.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting,
the camera is faulty. Arrange for
servicing.
Description %1 process failure (M301)
%1 mount or unmount
Meaning Mount or unmount process failed.
Description Invalid file (%1) can not remove.
(M302)
%1 Name of removed file
Meaning The invalid file could not be removed.
260
M303 Cannot process directory [err]
M304 Failed to recreate management
information [err]
ONVIF error (RTP)
R301 Distribution communication error [err]
R302 Parameter acquisition failure [err]
R303 Metadata distribution initialization
failure [err]
R304 Abnormal termination of client [err]
R304 Client disconnected [err]
R304 Client disconnected [err]
R305 RTSP processing error [err]
Description Can not open directory(%1)(M303)
%1 Directory name
Meaning Could not open directory to be
processed.
Description Fail updating management
file(%1)(M304)
%1 Management information identification
number
Meaning Process to recreate management
information failed.
Description message queue open error. %1 (R301)
%1 Modules that generate errors
RTP_CTRL_QUEUE
RTP_DATA_QUEUE
VIDEO_CTRL_QUEUE
VIDEO_DATA_QUEUE
AUDIO_CTRL_QUEUE
AUDIO_DATA_QUEUE
EVENT_CTRL_QUEUE
RECVQ_META
SENDQ_MEDIA
Meaning A communication error occurred
between modules.
Countermeasure If the problem persists after repeated
attempts and rebooting, the camera
may be faulty. Arrange for servicing.
Description cannot get parameter: %1 (R302)
%1 user_account: User account
IP_address: IP address of the camera
profile_media_configuration:MediaCon
figuration information
RTSP_port_number: RTSP port number
Meaning Parameter acquisition has failed.
Description metadata initialization error (R303)
Meaning Metadata distribution initialization has
failed.
Description delete session from some kind of error:
client_IP=%1, session_ID=%2 (R304)
%1 Client IP address
%2 Session ID
Meaning The client session terminated
abnormally.
Description connection reset by peer:
client_IP=%1 (R304)
%1 Client IP address
Meaning Disconnected from client.
Description RTP/HTTP connection closed by client
(R304)
Meaning Disconnected from client.
Description RTSP Error: error_code=500: Internal
Server Error (R305)
Meaning An RTSP processing error occurred.
Appendix
7
261
Warning log
System warning
S220 PAN/TILT operation warning [warning]
S230 Decrease of fan rotation speed
[warning]
S231 Heater unit not operating [warning]
HTTP server warning
H201 Timeout disconnect [warning]
wvhttp warning
W101 Invalid user name [notice]
W102 Invalid password [notice]
W130 Buffer recovered [notice]
W201 Invalid panorama image [warning]
W230 Buffer overflow [warning]
Audio server warning
B101 Received unusual request [notice]
Description %1 warning detected. [%2] (S220)
%1 PAN | TILT
%2 Warning details
Meaning An error occurred during operation or
stopping of PAN/TILT.
Countermeasure Check that the camera is not touching
the dome, etc.
Description FAN %1 speed is too slow. (S230)
%1 Fan number
Meaning Detected decrease in fan rotation
speed.
If this happens frequently, arrange for
servicing.
Description A 24 V AC power source is not
supplied to the heater unit. (S231)
Meaning A heater unit is attached but not
supplied with a 24 V AC power source.
Countermeasure The 24 V AC power source required to
operate the heater unit is not being
supplied. Check the connections.
Description a request for %1 timed out after writing
%d seconds (H201)
%1 Request URI
%d 360 (Timeout time)
Meaning Disconnected due to HTTP server
timeout (360 sec.).
Description user <User name> not found (W101)
Meaning The camera was accessed by an
unauthorized user.
Description user <User name> password
mismatch (W102)
Meaning The password is invalid.
Description stream buffer recovered (W130)
Meaning Image buffer for stream recording has
recovered.
Description corrupt panorama image - ignored
(W201)
Meaning Panorama image information
acquisition failed.
Description stream buffer overflowed (W230)
Meaning The image buffer for the stream
recording overflowed and images were
discarded.
Description %1 unusual request[%2] (B101)
%1 Client host’s IP address
%2 Unusual type (400 | 404)
Meaning Refused due to command error (400)
and parameter error (404).
262
B102 Client connection denied [notice]
B103 Client forcibly disconnected [notice]
B201 Event notification failure [warning]
B202 Event receive failure [warning]
B203 Audio message send failure [warning]
B204 Audio message receive error [warning]
Camera application warning
C201 Day/Night Mode switching warning
[warning]
C211 Camera control command overflow
[warning]
Video warning
V200 Video input warning [warning]
Uploader warning
A274 Event buffer for upload overflowed
[warning]
Description %1 request denied[%2] (B102)
%1 Client host IP address
%2 Denial type (41 | 43 | ...)
Meaning Client connection was denied due to
an authentication error (41), time
specification error (42), insufficient
resource (43), specification of
unsupported codec (45), specification
of unpermitted user level (47), too
many clients (49) or invalid operation
mode (4a).
Countermeasure 41: Check user name, password or
user list used when connecting.
42: Check playtime or maximum
connection time settings used when
connecting.
43: Reconnect or restart.
45: Use supported client software.
47: Check user level used when
connecting.
49: Check client number settings.
4a: Check if usage of audio server is
enabled.
Description %1 access denied[%2] (B103)
%1 Client host IP address
%2 Denial type (41 | 42 | 4a)
Meaning Connection was initially permitted, but
the setting has subsequently been
changed to prohibit access, thereby
triggering a forced disconnection (the
denial type is the same with B102).
Description cannot notify %1 event [%2] (B201)
%1 Event type (ald)
%2 Error number
Meaning Failed to notify event.
Description cannot recv event [%1] (B202)
%1 Error number
Meaning Failed to receive event.
Description audio message send error %1 [%2]
(B203)
%1 Message type
%2 Error number
Meaning Failed to send audio message.
Description audio message recv error [%1:%2]
(B204)
%1 Error number
%2 Reason for error
Meaning Failed to receive audio message.
Description Can’t switch Day/Night mode, because
current mode is Auto.(C201)
Meaning Day/Night Mode could not be
switched.
Countermeasure Set Day/Night Mode to manual.
Description command queue overflowed (C211)
Meaning The camera control command queue
overflowed, and some commands
were discarded.
Countermeasure Allow a longer interval (200 ms) for
sending the camera control command.
Description video %1 warning - %2 (V200)
%1 Video number
%2 Error number
Meaning An error that permits recovery of the
video input system was detected.
Countermeasure Change video size or video quality, or
decrease data size for each JPEG
image.
Description event queue is full (A274)
Meaning Event buffer for upload overflowed.
Countermeasure Make adjustments to reduce the
number of event occurrences.
Appendix
7
263
A275 Image buffer for upload overflowed
[warning]
Memory card warning
M201 Memory card is write-protected
[warning]
M203 Not enough space on memory card
[warning]
M204 Invalid file removed [warning]
M205 Checking management information file
[warning]
M206 Invalid management information
removed [warning]
Notification log
System notification
S001 System started [info]
S002 System settings changed [info]
S010 Event service started [info]
S011 Event service shut down [info]
S012 External device service started [info]
S013 External device service shut down
[info]
S014 Timer service started [info]
S015 Timer service shut down [info]
Description buffer queue is full (A275)
Meaning Image buffer for upload overflowed.
Countermeasure Make adjustments to reduce the
number of event occurrences. Also
adjust the video quality, video size and
frame rate for upload.
Description Readonly filesystem (M201)
Meaning A write-protected memory card is
inserted.
Description There is not available space (M203)
Meaning Insufficient memory card capacity.
Description Invalid file %1 was removed. (M204)
%1 Name of removed file
Meaning An invalid file was removed.
Description %1 checking management file (M205)
%1 Start | Finish
Meaning The memory card may have been
removed without being unmounted.
Start/finish checking management
information file.
Description Invalid db information(%1)(%2) was
removed(M206)
%1 Name of management information file
containing invalid information
%2 ID of invalid information
Meaning Invalid management information was
removed.
Description starting paramd (S001)
Meaning Parameter management module
started.
Description Updated system settings. (S002)
Meaning Settings not requiring rebooting were
changed.
Description starting event (S010)
Meaning The event service was started.
Description shutdown event (S011)
Meaning The event service was shut down.
Description starting extio (S012)
Meaning The external device input/output
service was started.
Description shutdown extio (S013)
Meaning The external device input/output
service was shut down.
Description starting timer (S014)
Meaning The timer service was started.
Description shutdown timer (S015)
Meaning The timer service was shut down.
264
S030 Heater unit detected [info]
S070 Change to SSL certificate [info]
HTTP server notification
H143 User name specification error [notice]
H144 Password specification error [notice]
wvhttp notification
W001 Starting and stopping of system [info]
W030 Startup and shutdown of WebView
Livescope Client [info]
W031 Transmitted video data size [info]
W040 Clearing to external memory [info]
Audio server notification
B001 Starting and stopping of audio server
[info]
B011 Audio client connected [info]
Description The heater unit is detected. (S030)
Meaning A heater unit is attached.
Description ssl: succeeded to %1 certificate
(S070)
%1 generate | load | delete | restore
Meaning A certificate was generated/loaded/
deleted/restored
Countermeasure None
Description (http_auth.c.XXX) get_password failed,
IP:%1 (H143)
%1 IP address
Meaning An unknown user was specified in user
authentication.
Description (http_auth.c.XXX) password doesn’t
match for %1 username%2, IP:%3
(H144)
%1 URL XSS vulnerability countermeasure
implementation (process equivalent to
ftpd)
%2 User Name
%3 IP address
Meaning A wrong password was specified in
user authentication.
Description %1 webview (W001)
%1 Starting or stopping
Meaning wvhttp server (webview) has started or
stopped.
Description %1%2 host=<Host>, user=<User>,
prio=<Priority>(W030)
%1 W: WebView session, V: Session-less
video client, N: Session-less event
client
%2 +: Connect, -: Disconnect
Meaning The camera server client was
connected or disconnected.
Description %1= host=<Host>, user=<User>,
video=<jpg | h264>:<Number of
frames> (W031)
1% W: WebView session, V: Session-less
video client
Meaning When a client disconnected, the total
data that was sent to the client
displayed in number of frames.
Description %1 the image storing - %2 (W040)
%1 Starting or stopping
%2 Reason for starting/stopping
Meaning Started or stopped clearing stream
recording to external memory.
Description %1 audio. (B001)
%1 starting | stopping
Meaning The audio server was started/shut
down.
Description [%1] %2 connected n=%3 (B011)
%1 Client type (send | recv)
%2 Client host IP address
%3 Total number of clients
Meaning An audio client was connected.
Appendix
7
265
B012 Audio client closed [info]
Camera application notification
C001 Starting and stopping of camera control
module [info]
C002 Camera application started and
stopped [info]
Video notification
V001 Starting and stopping of video server
[info]
V020 Starting intelligent service [info]
V021 Shutting down intelligence service [info]
Uploader notification
A004 Starting and stopping of uploader [info]
A040 Number of uploads (MAIL) [info]
A041 Number of uploads (FTP) [info]
A042 Number of uploads (HTTP) [info]
A120 Resolution of upload destination name
failed [notice]
A121 Connection to upload destination failed
[notice]
Description [%1] %2 closed n=%3 (B012)
%1 Client type (send | recv)
%2 Client host IP address
%3 Total number of clients
Meaning An audio client was disconnected.
Description %1 camerad (C001)
%1 starting | stopping
Meaning The camera control module started/
stopped.
Description starting cameraappl (C002)
Meaning The camera application started.
Description %1 video (V001)
%1 Starting or stopping
Meaning The video server was started/stopped.
Description starting intelligent. (V020)
Meaning Intelligent service was started.
Description shutdown intelligent. (V021)
Meaning Intelligent service was shut down.
Description %1 uploader (A004)
%1 Starting or stopping
Meaning The uploader was started or stopped.
Description uploader mail: normal=%1 test=%2
(A040)
%1 Number of normal uploads.
%2 Number of test uploads.
Meaning Shows the number of uploads
executed.
Description uploader ftp: normal=%1 test=%2
(A041)
%1 Number of normal uploads.
%2 Number of test uploads.
Meaning Shows the number of uploads
executed.
Description uploader http: normal=%1 test=%2
(A042)
%1 Number of normal uploads.
%2 Number of test uploads.
Meaning Shows the number of uploads
executed.
Description uploader cannot resolve the server
name (A120)
Meaning The name of the upload destination
could not be resolved.
Description uploader cannot connect the server
(A121)
Meaning Execution of connect to upload
destination failed.
266
A122 Connection to upload destination failed
[notice]
A134 Invalid upload setting (FTP/HTTP
mode) [notice]
A135 Invalid upload setting (FTP PORT/
PASV mode) [notice]
A136 Invalid upload setting (HTTP
notification only/image mode) [notice]
A137 Invalid upload setting (E-mail
notification) [notice]
A138 Invalid upload setting (E-mail
notification authentication mode) [notice]
Memory card notification
M001 Starting and stopping of memory card
control module [info]
M002 Valid management information
inserted [info]
M003 Started/finished recreation of
management information [info]
ONVIF notification
RTP
R001 Startup of RTP distribution module
[info]
R002 Stopping of RTP distribution module
[info]
Description uploader cannot connect the server
(A122)
Meaning The upload destination could not be
connected due to a reason other than
A120 and A121.
Description ftp/http mode invalid. uploader set
<none> forcibly (A134)
Meaning The upload mode setting is invalid. The
upload function was forcibly disabled.
Description ftp port/pasv mode invalid. uploader
set <pasv> forcibly (A135)
Meaning The PORT/PASV mode setting in
connection with FTP upload is invalid.
The PASV mode was forcibly set.
Description http notice/image mode invalid.
uploader set <image> forcibly (A136)
Meaning The notification only/image mode
setting in connection with HTTP upload
is invalid. The image mode was
forcibly set.
Description mode invalid. uploader set <none>
forcibly (A137)
Meaning The e-mail notification setting is invalid.
Email notification was forcibly
disabled.
Description authentication mode invalid. uploader
set <smtp auth> forcibly (A138)
Meaning The setting for e-mail notification
authentication mode is invalid.
“SMTP_AUTH” was forcibly set.
Description %1 sdctrl (M001)
%1 Starting or stopping
Meaning The memory card control module
(sdctrl) has started or stopped.
Description Valid db information (%1)(%2)(%3)
was inserted (M002)
%1 Name of management information file
with inserted valid information
%2 Directory number of valid information
%3 File number of valid information
Meaning Added to management information as
it appears to be a valid video file.
Description %1 updating management file
(%2)(M003)
%1 Start | Finish
%2 Management information identification
number
Meaning Process to recreate management
information finished.
Description starting media_plane (R001)
Meaning RTP distribution module started.
Description stoppting media_plane (R002)
Meaning RTP distribution module stopped.
Appendix
7
267
R003 RTSP PLAY request received [info]
R004 RTSP TEARDOWN request received
[info]
R005 Starting multicast [info]
R006 Stopping multicast [info]
R101 RTP session timeout [notice]
R102 Information acquisition failure (RTP
payload size) [notice]
R102 Information acquisition failure (IP
address) [notice]
R103 RTSP authentication failure [notice]
Description PLAY received: client_IP=%1,
profile=%2,
num_of_sessions=%3(V=%4, A=%5,
M=%6,BC=%7) (R003)
%1 Client IP address
%2 Profile name of requested PLAY
%3 Total number of client sessions
%4 Total distribution count of Video stream
%5 Total distribution count of Audio stream
%6 Total distribution count of Metadata
stream
%7 Total distribution count of
AudioBackChannel
Meaning RTSP PLAY request was received.
Description TEARDOWN received: client_IP=%1,
profile=%2,
num_of_sessions=%3(V=%4, A=%5,
M=%6,BC=%7) (R004)
%1 Client IP address
%2 Profile name of requested TEARDOWN
%3 Total number of client sessions
%4 Total distribution count of Video stream
%5 Total distribution count of Audio stream
%6 Total distribution count of Metadata
stream
%7 Total distribution count of
AudioBackChannel
Meaning RTSP TEARDOWN request was
received.
Description start multicast: profile=%1,
num_of_sessions=%2(V=%3, A=%4,
M=%5,BC=%6) (R005)
%1 Client IP address
%2 Profile name of requested
MulticastStreaming START
%3 Total distribution count of Video stream
%4 Total distribution count of Audio stream
%5 Total distribution count of Metadata
stream
%6 Total distribution count of
AudioBackChannel
Meaning Multicast was started.
Description stop multicast: profile=%1,
num_of_sessions=%2(V=%3, A=%4,
M=%5,BC=%6) (R006)
%1 Client IP address
%2 Profile name of requested
MulticastStreaming STOP
%3 Total distribution count of Video stream
%4 Total distribution count of Audio stream
%5 Total distribution count of Metadata
stream
%6 Total distribution count of
AudioBackChannel
Meaning Multicast was stopped.
Description session timeout: session ID=%1
(R101)
%1 Session ID
Meaning RTP session has timed out.
Description cannot get parameter:
RTP_payload_size (R102)
Meaning Information acquisition has failed (RTP
payload size).
Description cannot get parameter: IP_address
(R102)
Meaning Information acquisition has failed (IP
address).
Description RTSP authorization error (R103)
Meaning RTSP authentication has failed.
268
R107 RTSP connection failure [notice]
Description RTSP Error: error_code=%d: Service
Unavailable (R107)
%d 400: Value used for RTSP is invalid.
401: RTSP authentication failure or
missing valid authentication
information.
457: Playback time for RTSP is invalid.
501: An invalid RTSP option was used.
503: Failure to offer service, due to
insufficient resources.
The number of maximum RTP
sessions, has passed the limit.
Meaning RTSP connection has failed.
Appendix
7
269
Messages Displayed in the Information Display
Messages displayed in the information display of the Viewer are classified into the following three types.
Warning Message
List of Viewer Messages
Icon Category Explanation
Information Message Help messages on various buttons, pull-down lists, etc., as well as frame rate and other
information from the camera are shown.
Warning Message A message will be displayed notifying the user when camera control privileges cannot be
obtained, the audio session stops, etc.
Error Message Displayed when a system error occurs in the viewer.
Message Explanation
Could not connect to the camera. Connection failed due to an invalid IP address, etc.
The camera is busy. The connection limit was exceeded.
Failed to get camera control privileges. The request for camera control privileges was denied because the camera
was being used by the Admin Viewer, etc.
Failed to establish audio connection. Connection for audio reception failed.
You are not connected to the camera. An attempt was made to operate the camera when the camera was not
connected.
Please get camera control privileges. An attempt was made to operate the camera without camera control
privileges.
Another user is already connected as an
administrator.
The Admin Viewer is already connected to the camera.
The viewer is already connected in another
window.
The viewer is already available in another window.
No audio device. The [Audio] button has been clicked when there is no audio device
or the audio device has been disabled in the computer.
Failed to initialize Canon Network Camera Audio
Receiver.
ActiveX plugin is not installed within ten seconds after clicking the [Audio]
button.
Insufficient memory card capacity. An attempt was made to recording to a memory card with insufficient
capacity.
Recording to memory card is not allowed. Recording to the memory card failed because [Memory Card Operation
Status] > [Operation Settings] was not set to [Save Logs and Videos].
You cannot control the camera unless you exit
Viewer PTZ.
The video was clicked with the Viewer PTZ in the ON state while you have
control privileges.
270
If you have forgotten the settings and want to set the camera from the beginning, restore the factory default settings first.
It is recommended that you create a backup file using [Back Up Settings] in the Camera Management Tool before restoring
the factory default settings.
Note
• For details on using Camera Management Tool, please refer to “Camera Management Tool User Manual”.
• For factory default settings, please refer to P. 273.
Restoring the Initial Setting from the Maintenance Page in the Web
Browser
The maintenance page appears.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you want to restore the default settings. To restore the default
settings, click [OK].
Except for the following items, all user-defined settings will be discarded and restored to factory default settings
after the camera is rebooted.
– Administrator password of the basic settings, LAN, IPv4, IPv6
– Date and Time
– Host access restrictions for security
–SSL/TLS
– 802.1X
Restoring Factory Default Settings with the Reset Switch on the Camera
If you have forgotten or do not know the IP address of the camera or your Administrator password, you cannot operate the
camera via the network. In this case, reset the camera.
Restore Default Settings
1
Displays the Setting Page (P. 60).
2
On the Setting Menu page, click [Maintenance]
3
Click [Exec] of [Restore Default Settings] in [Tool].
Caution
• You must not turn off the camera while it is performing the [Restore Default Settings] operation. Turning off the
camera at this stage may result in disabling its ability to boot correctly.
• Once [OK] is clicked, you can no longer stop the process of restoring the default settings.
Appendix
7
271
Prepare the camera for being reset in advance.
In order to press the reset switch or restart switch, it may be necessary to remove such items as the dome case or cover.
For details, please refer to the “Installation Guide” included with the camera.
(VB-R11VE)
When the LED stops flashing, the reset procedure is complete.
Important
When a camera is initialized by pressing the reset switch, all network related settings including the camera IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway address are restored to the default settings so you will not be able to continue operation from the computer that was
connected. Use Camera Management Tool to set a suitable IP address for the operating environment (P. 37).
R11 R10
M641
M640
M741
M740
1
Hold down the reset switch while pressing the restart switch with a pointed object.
2
Release the restart switch after at least 3 seconds while still holding down the reset switch.
3
Release the reset switch when the LED starts flashing.
VB-R11VE/VB-R10VE
VB-M641V/VB-M640V
VB-M641VE/VB-M640VE
VB-M741LE/VB-M740E
Restart Switch
Reset switch
LED
Restart Switch
Reset switch
LED
Restart Switch
Reset switch
LED
Restart Switch
LED
Reset switch
272
(VB-R11)
The camera does not have a power switch. To turn the camera on or off, connect or disconnect the power cable.
The LED will flash.
When the LED stops flashing, the reset procedure is complete.
R11
1
Turn the camera off by disconnecting the power cable.
2
Hold down the reset switch and connect the power cable. Continue to hold the reset switch for five seconds or
longer.
3
Release the reset switch.
Restart Switch
LED
Appendix
7
273
List of Factory Default Settings
Item Setting
•LAN
LAN Interface Auto
Maximum Packet Size 1500
•IPv4
IPv4 Address Setting Method Manual
IPv4 Address 192.168.100.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
IPv4 Default Gateway Address
AutoIP Enable
IPv4 Address (AutoIP)
•IPv6
IPv6 Enable
Auto (RA) Enable
Auto (DHCPv6) Enable
IPv6 Address (Manual)
Prefix Length 64
IPv6 Default Gateway Address
IPv6 Address (Auto)
• DNS
Name Server Address 1
Name Server Address 2
Auto-Setting of Name Server
Address
Disable
Host Name
Host Name Registration with
DDNS
Disable
Search Domain
Search Domain List
• mDNS
Use mDNS Enable
• User Name (Administrator ID) root
• Administrator Password camera
• Current Date and Time
• Setting
Setting Method Set manually
Auto-Setting of NTP Server Disable
NTP Server
Time zone (GMT+09:00) Osaka,
Sapporo, Tokyo
Daylight Saving Time Disable
• All Videos
Video Size Set 1280x720 / 640x360 /
320x180
•JPEG
Video Quality: 320x180 6
Video Quality: 640x360 6
Video Quality: 1280x720 6
Video Quality: Digital PTZ 6
Video Size: video Transmission 320x180
Maximum Frame Rate: Video
Transmission
30.0
Video Size: Upload/
Memory Card
320x180
• H.264(1)
Video Size 320x180
Bit Rate Control Use bit rate control
Video Quality 6
Target Bit Rate (kbps) 2048
Frame Rate (fps) 30
I Frame Interval (sec) 1
• H.264(2)
H.264(2) Disable
Video Size 320x180
Bit Rate Control Use bit rate control
Video Quality 6
Target Bit Rate (kbps) 2048
Frame Rate (fps) 30
I Frame Interval (sec) 1
• Camera Name
Camera Name (alphanumeric
characters)
Camera
• Camera Control
Digital Zoom Disable
Image Stabilizer Disable
AGC Limit 6
Smart Shade Control Strength
(Auto)
Medium
Haze Compensation Strength
(Auto)
Medium
Infrared Strength (Auto) Strong
Item Setting
M641
M640
M741 M740
R11
R10
M741
274
Pan/Tilt Speed Control Control by zoom
position
Auto Flip Enable
• Day/Night (When Auto Is Set)
Switching Brightness Standard
Response (sec.) 20
• Installation Conditions
LED Setting Turn On
Image Flip Disable
• Camera Position Control
Restricted to Presets No Restriction
Camera Position without Control Do not return to Home
Position
• External Input Device 1
Device Name (alphanumeric
characters)
• External Input Device 2
Device Name (alphanumeric
characters)
• External Output Device 1
Device Name (alphanumeric
characters)
• External Output Device 2
Device Name (alphanumeric
characters)
• Initial Camera Settings
Pan/Tilt/Zoom position Enable
Focus Auto
Exposure Auto
Slow Shutter Disable
Shutter Speed 1/60
Exposure Compensation 0
Metering Mode Center-Weighted
Smart Shade Control Disable
Smart Shade Control level 1 (Mild)
White Balance Auto
R Gain 255
B Gain 255
Noise Reduction Standard
Sharpness 3
Color Saturation 4
Haze Compensation Disable
Item Setting
R11
R10
R11
R10
M741
M740
R11
R10
R11
R10
M641
M741
R11
R10
M641
M741
R11
R10
M641
M741
R11
R10
M641
M741
Haze Compensation Level 2
Day/Night Day Mode
Use Infrared Day/Night Operation
• Specified Area
Area 1 (Pink) Disable
Area 2 (Purple) Disable
Area 3 (Blue) Disable
Area 4 (Cyan) Disable
Area 5 (Green) Disable
Area 6 (Yellow) Disable
Area 7 (Orange) Disable
Area 8 (White) Disable
•ADSR
Use H.264(1) Disable
Use H.264(2) Disable
• On-Screen Display
Date display Disable
Position of date display Upper left
Format of date display YYYY/MM/DD
Time display Disable
Position of time display Upper left
Text display Disable
Position of text display Upper left
Text string display
Color of text White
Background color Black
Color depth of text and
background
Fill text and
background color
• General Sound
Input Volume 50
Output Volume 50
Echo Canceller Disable
Audio Input Line In
• Sound Clip Upload 1
Sound Clip Name
• Sound Clip Upload 2
Sound Clip Name
• Sound Clip Upload 3
Sound Clip Name
• HTTP Server
Authentication Method Digest Authentication
Item Setting
M741
R11
M641
M741
Appendix
7
275
HTTP Port 80
HTTPS Port 443
•SNMP Server
SNMP Disable
Community Name public
Administrator Contact Information
Administration Function Name
VB-R11/VB-R11VE/
VB-R10VE
VB-M641VE/
VB-M641V/
VB-M640VE/VB-M640V
VB-M741LE/VB-M740E
Installation Location
• FTP Server
Use FTP Server Disable
• WS-Security
Check Time on Authentication Check
•Video Server
Maximum Number of Clients 30
Camera Control Queue Length 30
Maximum Connection Time (sec.) 0
Camera Control Time (sec.) 20
• Audio Server
Audio Transmission from the
Camera
Disable
Voice Activity Detection Disable
Audio Reception from Viewer Disable
• RTP Server
RTP Enable
RTSP Authentication Method Digest Authentication
RTSP Port 554
• Audio Multicast
Multicast Address 0.0.0.0
Multicast Port Number 0
Multicast TTL 1
• RTP Streaming 1
Video Size 320x180 JPEG
Frame Rate 5
Multicast Address 0.0.0.0
Multicast Port Number 0
Multicast TTL 1
Item Setting
R11 R10
M641 M640
M741 M740
R11
M641
M741
R11
M641
M741
Audio Transmission Disable
• RTP Streaming 2
Video Size 320x180 JPEG
Frame Rate 10
Multicast Address 0.0.0.0
Multicast Port Number 0
Multicast TTL 1
Audio Transmission Disable
• RTP Streaming 3
Video Size 320x180 JPEG
Frame Rate 15
Multicast Address 0.0.0.0
Multicast Port Number 0
Multicast TTL 1
Audio Transmission Disable
• RTP Streaming 4
Video Size 320x180 JPEG
Frame Rate 30
Multicast Address 0.0.0.0
Multicast Port Number 0
Multicast TTL 1
Audio Transmission Disable
• RTP Streaming 5
Video Size H.264(1)
Frame rate 5
Multicast Address 0.0.0.0
Multicast Port Number 0
Multicast TTL 1
Audio Transmission Disable
• Video Record Setting
Video Record Action Upload
• General Upload
Upload Upload Disabled
Video Format JPEG
Frame Rate 1
Pre-event Buffer (number of
frames)
0
Post-event Buffer (number of
frames)
0
Pre-event Buffer (sec) 0
Item Setting
R11
M641
M741
R11
M641
M741
R11
M641
M741
R11
M641
M741
R11
M641
M741
276
Post-event Buffer (sec) 0
• HTTP Upload
Notification Notification Only with
HTTP
URI
User Name
Proxy Server
Proxy Port 80
Proxy User Name
Parameter (query string)
• FTP Upload
Notification Video data upload with
FTP
FTP Server
User Name
PASV Mode Enable
File Upload Path
File Naming YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
ms
Subdirectory Name to Create
File Name to Create image.jpg
File Name to Create video.mov
Maximum Number of Loops 0
• Video Record Setting
Video Record Action Upload
• Memory Card Operations
Operation Settings Save Logs and Videos
Video Format JPEG
Pre-event Buffer (number of
frames)
0
Post-event Buffer (number of
frames)
0
Pre-event Buffer (sec) 0
Post-event Buffer (sec) 0
Overwrite videos Disable
Auto Video Delete Disable
Days Saved 30
Delete Time 00:00
• E-mail Notification
Notification Text Only
Mail Server Name
Mail Server Port 25
Sender (From)
Recipient (To)
Item Setting
Authentication None
User Name
POP Server
Subject
Message Body
• External Device Output 1
Operation Mode Normally Open
Active Output Format Continuous
Pulse Output Time (sec) 1
• External Device Output 2
Operation Mode Normally Open
Active Output Format Continuous
Pulse Output Time (sec) 1
• External Device Input
External Device Input Event Enable
• External Device Input 1
Operation Mode Normally Open
Active Event Operation Disable
Inactive Event Operation Disable
Ongoing Active Event Operation Disable
Preset Not specified
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for Active
Event
Disable
External Device Output for Inactive
Event
Disable
Audio Playback at Active Event Disable
Audio Playback at Inactive Event Disable
Sound Clip
Volume 50
Day/Night Mode Switching Disable
• External Device Input 2
Operation Mode Normally Open
Active Event Operation Disable
Inactive Event Operation Disable
Ongoing Active Event Operation Disable
Preset Not specified
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for Active
Event
Disable
Item Setting
R11
M641 M741
R11
R11
Appendix
7
277
External Device Output for Inactive
Event
Disable
Audio Playback at Active Event Disable
Audio Playback at Inactive Event Disable
Sound Clip
Volume 50
Day/Night Mode Switching Disable
• Volume Detection
Volume Detection Event Disable
Detect Criteria The reference volume
level or above
Reference Volume Level 50
Detect Criteria Duration (sec) 0
ON Event Operation Disable
OFF Event Operation Disable
Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable
Preset Not specified
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for ON
Event
Disable
External Device Output for OFF
Event
Disable
• Scream Detection
Scream Detection Event Disable
ON Event Operation Disable
Preset Not specified
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for ON
Event
Disable
•Timer 1
Timer Event Disable
24-Hour Continuous Setting Disable
Start Time 00:00
End Time 00:00
Repeat Interval None
•Operation
Start Time Preset Not specified
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output Disable
Item Setting
R11
M641
M741
R11
R11
R11
R10
R11 R10
M641 M741
Day/Night Mode Switching Disable
•Timer 2
Timer Event Disable
24-Hour Continuous Setting Disable
Start Time 00:00
End Time 00:00
Repeat Interval None
•Operation
Start Time Preset Not specified
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output Disable
•Timer 3
Timer Event Disable
24-Hour Continuous Setting Disable
Start Time 00:00
End Time 00:00
Repeat Interval None
•Operation
Start Time Preset Not specified
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output Disable
•Timer 4
Timer Event Disable
24-Hour Continuous Setting Disable
Start Time 00:00
End Time 00:00
Repeat Interval None
•Operation
Start Time Preset Not specified
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output Disable
• Day/Night Mode Switching
Preset when Switching to Day
Mode
Not specified
Preset when Switching to Night
Mode
Not specified
• Linked Event 1
Item Setting
R11
R10
R11
R10
M641
M741
R11
R10
R11
R10
M641
M741
R11
R10
R11
R10
M641
M741
R11
M641 M741
278
Linked Event Disable
Event Linking Method AND
Event Order Not specified
Event Interval (sec.) 2
Event 1
Event Type External Device Input
External Device Input Input 1
Status Active
Event 2
Event Type Intelligent Function
Intelligent Function Setting 1
Status ON
Operation
ON Event Operation Disable
Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable
OFF Event Operation Disable
Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for ON
Event
Disable
External Device Output for OFF
Event
Disable
Audio Playback at ON Event Disable
Audio Playback at OFF Event Disable
Sound Clip
Volume 50
• Linked Event 2
Linked Event Disable
Event Linking Method AND
Event Order Not specified
Event Interval (sec.) 2
Event 1
Event Type External Device Input
External Device Input Input 1
Status Active
Event 2
Event Type Intelligent Function
Intelligent Function Setting 1
Status ON
Operation
ON Event Operation Disable
Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable
Item Setting
R11
OFF Event Operation Disable
Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for ON
Event
Disable
External Device Output for OFF
Event
Disable
Audio Playback at ON Event Disable
Audio Playback at OFF Event Disable
Sound Clip
Volume 50
• Linked Event 3
Linked Event Disable
Event Linking Method AND
Event Order Not specified
Event Interval (sec.) 2
Event 1
Event Type External Device Input
External Device Input Input 1
Status Active
Event 2
Event Type Intelligent Function
Intelligent Function Setting 1
Status ON
Operation
ON Event Operation Disable
Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable
OFF Event Operation Disable
Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for ON
Event
Disable
External Device Output for OFF
Event
Disable
Audio Playback at ON Event Disable
Audio Playback at OFF Event Disable
Sound Clip
Volume 50
• Linked Event 4
Linked Event Disable
Event Linking Method AND
Event Order Not specified
Item Setting
R11
R11
Appendix
7
279
Event Interval (sec.) 2
Event 1
Event Type External Device Input
External Device Input Input 1
Status Active
Event 2
Event Type Intelligent Function
Intelligent Function Setting 1
Status ON
Operation
ON Event Operation Disable
Ongoing ON Event Operation Disable
OFF Event Operation Disable
Preset None
Video Record Disable
E-mail Notification Disable
External Device Output for ON
Event
Disable
External Device Output for OFF
Event
Disable
Audio Playback at ON Event Disable
Audio Playback at OFF Event Disable
Sound Clip
Volume 50
• Authorized User Account
User List
•User Authority
Authorized User
Privileged Camera Control Checked
Camera Control Checked
Video Distribution Checked
Audio Distribution Checked
Guest User
Camera Control Checked
Video Distribution Checked
Audio Distribution Checked
• IPv4 Host Access Restrictions
Apply Host Access Restrictions Disable
Default Policy Authorize Access
Network Address / Subnet 01: / 32 Yes
02: / 32 Yes
03: / 32 Yes
Item Setting
R11
R11
M641 M741
R11
M641 M741
04: / 32 Yes
05: / 32 Yes
06: / 32 Yes
07: / 32 Yes
08: / 32 Yes
09: / 32 Yes
10: / 32 Yes
11: / 32 Yes
12: / 32 Yes
13: / 32 Yes
14: / 32 Yes
15: / 32 Yes
16: / 32 Yes
17: / 32 Yes
18: / 32 Yes
19: / 32 Yes
20: / 32 Yes
• IPv6 Host Access Restrictions
Apply Host Access Restrictions Disable
Default Policy Authorize Access
Prefix / Prefix Length 01: / 128 Yes
02: / 128 Yes
03: / 128 Yes
04: / 128 Yes
05: / 128 Yes
06: / 128 Yes
07: / 128 Yes
08: / 128 Yes
09: / 128 Yes
10: / 128 Yes
11: / 128 Yes
12: / 128 Yes
13: / 128 Yes
14: / 128 Yes
15: / 128 Yes
16: / 128 Yes
17: / 128 Yes
18: / 128 Yes
19: / 128 Yes
20: / 128 Yes
• Certificates
Certificate Status Not Installed
Item Setting
280
Country (C)
State/Province (ST)
Locality (L)
Organization (O)
Organizational Unit (OU)
Common Name (CN)
Validity Period Start Date
Validity Period End Date
• Encrypted communications
SSL Communications Disable
• 802.1X Authentication
802.1X Authentication? Disable
Authentication Status Stop
• Authentication Method
Authentication Method EAP-MD5
User Name
•IPsec
IPsec Auto Key Exchange
• Auto Key Exchange Settings
IPsec SA Encryption Algorithm AES->3DES
IPsec SA Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
IPsec SA Validity Period (min) 480
ISAKMP SA Encryption Algorithm AES->3DES
ISAKMP SA Authentication
Algorithm
SHA1
DH Group Group 2
ISAKMP SA Validity Period (min) 480
• IPsec Set 1
IPsec Set Disable
IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode
Destination IPv4 Address
Destination IPv6 Address
Source IPv4 Address
Source IPv6 Address
Security Protocol ESP
Security Gateway IPv4 Address
Security Gateway IPv6 Address
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16
Destination Prefix Length 16
IKE Pre-Shared Key
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES
SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
Item Setting
SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA ESP SPI (outbound)
SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA ESP SPI (inbound)
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA AH Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA AH SPI (outbound)
SA AH Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA AH SPI (inbound)
• IPsec Set 2
IPsec Set Disable
IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode
Destination IPv4 Address
Destination IPv6 Address
Source IPv4 Address
Source IPv6 Address
Security Protocol ESP
Security Gateway IPv4 Address
Security Gateway IPv6 Address
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16
Destination Prefix Length 16
IKE Pre-Shared Key
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES
SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA ESP SPI (outbound)
SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA ESP SPI (inbound)
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA AH Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA AH SPI (outbound)
SA AH Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA AH SPI (inbound)
Item Setting
Appendix
7
281
• IPsec Set 3
IPsec Set Disable
IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode
Destination IPv4 Address
Destination IPv6 Address
Source IPv4 Address
Source IPv6 Address
Security Protocol ESP
Security Gateway IPv4 Address
Security Gateway IPv6 Address
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16
Destination Prefix Length 16
IKE Pre-Shared Key
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES
SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA ESP SPI (outbound)
SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA ESP SPI (inbound)
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA AH Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA AH SPI (outbound)
SA AH Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA AH SPI (inbound)
• IPsec Set 4
IPsec Set Disable
IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode
Destination IPv4 Address
Destination IPv6 Address
Source IPv4 Address
Source IPv6 Address
Security Protocol ESP
Security Gateway IPv4 Address
Security Gateway IPv6 Address
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16
Destination Prefix Length 16
IKE Pre-Shared Key
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES
Item Setting
SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA ESP SPI (outbound)
SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA ESP SPI (inbound)
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA AH Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA AH SPI (outbound)
SA AH Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA AH SPI (inbound)
• IPsec Set 5
IPsec Set Disable
IPsec Mode Tunnel Mode
Destination IPv4 Address
Destination IPv6 Address
Source IPv4 Address
Source IPv6 Address
Security Protocol ESP
Security Gateway IPv4 Address
Security Gateway IPv6 Address
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16
Destination Prefix Length 16
IKE Pre-Shared Key
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm AES
SA ESP Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA ESP SPI (outbound)
SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)
SA ESP Authentication Key
(inbound)
SA ESP SPI (inbound)
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96
SA AH Authentication Key
(outbound)
SA AH SPI (outbound)
SA AH Authentication Key
(inbound)
Item Setting
282
SA AH SPI (inbound)
Item Setting
283
8
Numerics
802.1X Authentication ...................................... 124
A
Abandoned Object Detection .................. 211, 221
Access Control ......................................... 118, 138
Admin Tools ..................................................... 192
Admin Tools Certificate ................................ 22, 28
Admin Viewer ................................... 138, 140, 141
Administrator .................................................... 138
Administrator Password ............................... 36, 68
ADSR .................................................................. 82
AGC Limit ........................................................... 75
Aperture ..................................................... 80, 163
Area Zoom ....................................................... 150
Area Zoom/Drag to Move ................................. 142
Audio Detection ............................... 107, 185, 213
Audio Distribution ..................................... 118, 138
Audio Input ......................................................... 87
Audio Multicast .................................................. 93
Audio Reception ........................................ 92, 142
Audio Server ...................................................... 92
Audio Transmission .................................... 92, 142
Authentication Method ............................... 89, 124
Authorized Users ..................................... 118, 138
Auto Control Settings ....................................... 177
Auto Flip ..................................................... 76, 209
Auto Key Exchange ......................................... 126
Auto Tracking ........................... 185, 213, 214, 230
Auto Video Delete ............................................ 132
AutoIP ........................................................... 38, 65
B
Back Light Compensation ........................ 142, 155
Back Up Settings ............................................. 135
Basic Camera Settings ...................................... 37
Bit Rate Control .................................................. 73
C
Camera Angle Setting Tool .................... 22, 28, 45
Camera Control ........................................ 118, 138
Camera Control Privilege Status Indicator ....... 188
Camera Control Privileges ............................... 142
Camera Management Tool .................... 21, 28, 36
Camera Name .................................................... 75
Camera Search Settings .................................... 36
Camera Tampering Detection .................. 212, 223
Certificate Information ...................................... 124
Certificate Management ........................... 122, 125
Client ................................................................ 124
Color Saturation ......................................... 81, 168
Context Menu ................... 145, 175, 183, 189, 229
Control for Admin ..................................... 158, 195
Control Privileges ............................................. 147
Custom Installation ............................................. 29
D
Date .................................................................... 69
Day Mode ......................................................... 165
Day/Night ........................................... 77, 112, 165
Day/Night Mode Focus Settings ...................... 165
Daylight Saving Time ......................................... 71
Default Gateway Address ............................ 65, 66
Detect Criteria .................................................. 107
Detection Areas ............................................... 234
Detection Criteria ..................................... 218, 219
Detection Lines ........................................ 224, 234
Detections Settings .......................................... 228
Device Information ........................................... 134
Device Name ..................................................... 78
DHCP ........................................................... 37, 64
DHCPv6 ............................................................. 65
Digital PTZ ........................................................ 153
Digital Zoom ............................................... 75, 148
Display Options ................................................ 234
Display Size ..................................................... 144
DNS .................................................................... 66
Download ......................................................... 236
Log Files .................................................... 236
Video .................................................. 242, 250
Drag to Move ................................................... 150
E
Easy Installation ................................................. 29
E-mail Notification ................... 102, 106, 108, 109,
111, 115, 228
Encrypted Communications ............................. 123
Error Message .................................................. 269
Event ................................................................ 227
Index
284
Event Display ........................................... 184, 234
Exposure .................................................... 80, 162
Exposure Compensation ...................... 55, 80, 162
External Device Input ............................... 104, 184
External Device Output ............................ 104, 167
External Input Device ......................................... 78
External Output Device ...................................... 78
F
Factory Default Settings ........................... 270, 273
Filter ......................................................... 238, 241
Firewall ............................................................... 31
Firmware .......................................................... 134
Focus ................................................... 54, 80, 161
Format .............................................................. 132
Frame Rate ............................................. 74, 94, 97
FTP Server .......................................................... 90
FTP Upload ........................................................ 99
Full Screen Display .......................................... 144
G
Gain ............................................................ 80, 163
Guest Users ............................................. 118, 138
H
H.264 Video ........................... 23, 73, 82, 168, 246
H.264(1) ............................................................. 73
H.264(2) ............................................................. 74
Haze Compensation .................................. 81, 160
Haze Compensation Strength ............................ 76
Home Position ............................ 78, 142, 170, 172
Host Access Restrictions ......................... 119, 120
HTTP Port ........................................................... 89
HTTP Server ....................................................... 89
HTTP Upload ...................................................... 97
HTTPS Port ......................................................... 89
I
I Frame Interval .................................................. 74
Image Detection ............................................... 184
Image Flip .................................................... 52, 78
Image Stabilizer ................................................. 75
Information Display .................................. 142, 143
Information Message ....................................... 269
Infrared ....................................................... 81, 167
Infrared Filter .................................................... 165
Infrared Illumination Strength ........................... 167
Infrared Strength ................................................ 76
Initial Setting ................................. 36, 79, 159, 270
Initial Setting Registration ................................ 159
Input Volume ...................................................... 87
Installation Guide ................................................. 5
Intelligent Function
Display Options ......................................... 234
Operation Mode ......................................... 214
Restart ....................................................... 235
Intelligent Function Setting Tool ....................... 210
Intrusion Detection ................................... 213, 226
IPsec ................................................................ 126
IPv4 .............................................................. 37, 64
IPv4 Address ...................................................... 37
IPv6 .................................................................... 65
J
JPEG Video ........................................ 72, 168, 245
L
LAN .................................................................... 64
Language Button ............................................... 41
LED .................................................................... 78
Linked Event ............................................ 113, 185
Lock camera position ....................................... 216
Log ................................................................... 236
Log Code ......................................................... 237
Log Messages ................................................. 256
Log Viewer ....................................................... 236
Logs ................................................................. 134
M
Maintenance .................................................... 134
Maximum Frame Rate ................................ 73, 168
Maximum Number of Clients .............................. 91
Maximum Packet Size ........................................ 64
Memory Card ..................... 20, 101, 130, 142, 250
Memory Card Capacity .................................... 133
Memory Card Information ........................ 132, 241
Message
Error Message ........................................... 269
Information Message ................................. 269
Log Message ............................................. 256
Warning Message ...................................... 269
Metering Mode ........................................... 80, 163
Microphone ................................................ 87, 155
Modifier ............................................................ 252
Mount ............................................................... 131
Moving Object Detection ......................... 211, 220
285
8
Multicast DNS .................................................... 67
N
Name Server Address ........................................ 66
Network .............................................................. 64
Network Address / Subnet ............................... 119
Night Mode ...................................................... 165
Noise Reduction ......................................... 81, 168
NTP Server ......................................................... 69
O
One-shot AF ............................................... 54, 161
One-shot WB .................................................... 164
On-screen display .............................................. 85
Operation Mode ....................................... 104, 105
Operation Settings ........................................... 131
Output Volume ................................................... 87
Overwrite videos .............................................. 132
P
Pan ..................................................... 53, 147, 148
Panorama Creation Tool .................................. 201
Panorama Display Panel .................................. 151
Panorama Screen ............................................ 207
Parameter ................................... 98, 100, 103, 252
Passing Detection .................................... 212, 224
Password ....................................... 36, 38, 42, 118
Playback Videos .............................................. 245
Post-event Buffer ........................................ 97, 131
Pre-event Buffer ......................................... 97, 131
Prefix .......................................................... 66, 120
Preset ............... 105, 108, 109, 115, 154, 159, 169
Advanced Settings .................................... 173
Auto Control ............................................... 177
Quick Registration ..................................... 172
Register ..................................................... 170
Start Time of Timer .................................... 110
Tour Route ................................................. 179
When switching Day/Night Mode .............. 112
Preset Name .................................................... 174
Preset Registration Panel ................................. 170
Preset Selection Menu ..................................... 154
Privacy Mask Setting Tool ................................ 196
Privilege ........................................................... 138
Privileged Camera Control ....................... 118, 138
Pulse ................................................................ 104
R
Reboot .............................................................. 134
Receive Audio .................................................. 155
Reconnect ........................................................ 142
Recorded Video Utility ............................. 187, 240
Recording Manually ......................................... 186
Recording to Memory Card .............................. 186
Recreate Video Management Information ....... 132
Reference Volume Level .................................. 107
Refresh Drive System ....................................... 135
Removed Object Detection ...................... 211, 222
Reset Switch .................................................... 270
Restore Settings ............................................... 135
Revert to Initial Settings ................................... 134
RM-Lite ............................................................... 22
Rotation .............................................................. 53
RTP ..................................................................... 93
RTSP .................................................................. 93
S
Scream Detection ............................................ 108
Self-Signed Certificate ..................................... 121
Setting Menus .............................................. 60, 62
Setup CD-ROM ........................................ 5, 21, 28
Sharpness .................................................. 81, 168
Shutter Speed ............................................ 80, 163
Slow Shutter ............................................... 80, 163
Smart Shade Control .......................... 80, 159, 160
Smart Shade Control Strength ........................... 76
Snapshot .......................................................... 186
SNMP Server ...................................................... 89
Software Installation ........................................... 28
Sound Clip Upload ............................................. 88
Specify the initial camera position ................... 230
SSL Communications ....................................... 123
SSL/TLS Certificate .......................................... 121
Subnet Mask ...................................................... 65
Switch Day/Night ...................... 106, 111, 112, 177
T
Target Bit Rate ................................................... 73
Tilt ....................................................... 53, 147, 148
Time ................................................................... 69
Time Zone .......................................................... 71
Timer ........................................................ 110, 177
Top Page ............................................................ 41
Tour Route Settings .......................................... 179
Tracking Conditions ......................................... 231
286
Transmit Audio ................................................. 156
Troubleshooting ............................................... 254
Trusted Sites ................................................ 32, 40
Types of Detection ........................... 211, 213, 217
U
Unmount ........................................................... 132
Upload ............................................................... 96
User Account ................................................... 118
User Authentication ............................................ 42
User List ........................................................... 118
User Name ......................................... 42, 118, 138
User Page .......................................................... 63
V
VB Viewer ......................................... 138, 141, 188
Video Detection ................................ 211, 214, 216
Video Distribution ..................................... 118, 138
Video Format ...................................... 97, 131, 240
Video Quality ................................................ 73, 74
Video Record ................... 106, 108, 109, 111, 115
Video Record Action .................................. 96, 130
Video Record Setting ....................................... 101
Video Saving .................................................... 133
Video Server ....................................................... 91
Video Size ............................................ 72, 94, 143
Video Size Set .................................................... 72
View Restriction Setting Tool ............................ 206
Viewer
Admin Viewer .................................... 138, 147
RM-Lite Viewer ............................................ 22
VB Viewer .......................................... 138, 188
Viewer PTZ ....................................................... 151
Voice Activity Detection ..................................... 92
Volume ..................................................... 106, 228
Volume Detection ............................................. 107
W
Warning Message ............................................ 269
White Balance ............................................ 81, 164
WS-Security ........................................................ 90
Z
Zoom .................................................. 54, 147, 148
BIE-7048-001 © CANON INC. 2015
… 7 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Canon VB-M741LE bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Canon VB-M741LE in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 9,75 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Canon VB-M741LE

Canon VB-M741LE Installatiehandleiding - Deutsch, English, Français, Italiano, Espanõl - 4 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info